JP2019181089A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that improves the amusement of a presentation performed in accordance with a player's motion.SOLUTION: When a display mode at a final shift time of a reservation display is a normal mode (round shape), for a change suggestion presentation at a first time, a first change suggestion presentation is to be performed in which a character having no weapon appears to perform an action, and when the display mode at the final shift time of the reservation display is a second specific mode (sword shape), for the change suggestion presentation at the first time, a third change suggestion presentation is to be performed in which a character having a sword appears to perform an action. The rate at which the display mode of a motion-related display changes to a display mode with a high expectation degree for a big win is high when the third change suggestion presentation is performed than when the first change suggestion presentation is performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11-9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in Patent Document 1, as a gaming machine that performs an effect in response to an operation of the operation means, an operation promotion display that prompts the user to operate the operation means is displayed while the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable display or stopped display. There has been proposed a gaming machine that displays regardless of the type and changes the display mode of the operation promotion display.

JP 2017-164504 A (FIG. 97)

  In the gaming machine as described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improving the interest of the performance performed by the player's action.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the effects performed by the player's actions.

The gaming machine of means Y1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative display of decorative symbols) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Specific display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a specific display (holding display) corresponding to the variable display;
An action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an action effect (cut-in notice effect, result notification effect) by the player's action;
Motion related display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a motion related display (motion related display 04TM001) related to the motion effect,
There are a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal mode) and a second mode (first special mode, second special mode, or third special mode) as the display mode of the operation related display.
When the motion-related display is displayed in the second mode, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the motion-related display is displayed in the first mode (FIG. 11-8 (A)). As shown in the above, the motion-related display in the first special mode to the third special mode has a higher expectation of jackpot than the motion-related display in the normal mode)
Depending on the display mode of the specific display, the rate at which the motion related display is displayed in the second mode is different (as shown in FIGS. 11-8 to 11-11, the display mode of the hold display is changed. The rate of changing the display mode of the action-related display is higher than when the display mode of the hold display has not changed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by providing a relationship between the display mode of the specific display and the display mode of the operation related display.

The gaming machine of means Y2 is
A gaming machine of means Y1,
The action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can display an action promotion display that prompts the player's action in a display mode corresponding to the display mode of the action related display (the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is a normal mode). Corresponding to the motion related display 04TM001, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A corresponds to the motion related display 04TM001 of the first special mode, and the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is the motion related display of the second special mode. 04TM001, the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C corresponds to the operation related display 04TM001 of the third special mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, an interest can be improved by relating the display mode of the action promotion display and the display mode of the action related display.

The gaming machine of means Y3 is
A gaming machine of means Y1 or means Y2,
The motion related display means (production control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the motion related display (motion related display 04TM001), and the motion related display corresponding to one motion effect (result notification effect). Can be changed a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11), the change timing of the first motion-related display 04TM001 is the timing after the start of the variable display (FIG. 11- 14 is the timing after the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice is completed (the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 11-14). Is)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a structure, the opportunity for the display mode of an action-related display to change increases, a player can have a sense of expectation, and an interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Y4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Y1 to the means Y3,
The operation related display means (production control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation related display (operation related display 04TM001),
A first notice effect (first SU notice effect) for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state and a second notice effect (second SU notice effect) suggesting that the display mode of the operation-related display changes are executed. A possible notice effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is provided,
At least a part of the first notice effect and the second notice effect are common (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11), the first stage of the first SU notice effect and the second SU notice effect). (Step 1 is a common production mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to which of the first notice effect and the second notice effect is executed, and the interest of the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Y5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means Y1 to the means Y4,
The operation related display means (production control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation related display (operation related display 04TM001),
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the control is in the advantageous state
The operation related display means (production control CPU 120) displays the operation related display from before the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (1) to 11-17 (13)). The motion-related display 04TM001 is displayed from before the establishment), and the display mode of the motion-related display can be changed before the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11)) Before the state is established, it is possible to change the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 from the normal mode to the first special mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player's interest in the motion-related display can be increased and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Y6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Y1 to the means Y5,
The display mode of the operation related display includes a third mode corresponding to the notification that the advantageous state is controlled (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the final display mode of the operation related display is (In the case of the third special mode [crack (large)], it will be a big hit at a rate of 100%)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player's interest in the motion-related display can be increased and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Y7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Y1 to the means Y6,
Motion detection means (sphere button 04TM102A) for detecting the player's motion;
Change means (effect control CPU 120) for changing the mode of the motion detection means,
The changing means can change the mode of the motion detecting means in accordance with the display mode of the motion related display (as shown in FIG. 11-17 (19), the second special button of the spherical button 04TM102A). The mode and the second special mode of the motion related display 04TM001 correspond to each other. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (25), the first special mode of the spherical button 04TM102A and the first special mode of the motion related display 04TM001 In addition, the third special mode of the spherical button 04TM102A corresponds to the third special mode of the motion-related display 04TM001.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by providing a relationship between the display mode of the motion related display and the mode of the motion detection means.

The gaming machine of means Y8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Y1 to the means Y7,
The operation effect execution means (effect control CPU 120)
The action promotion display that prompts the player's action can be displayed in a display form corresponding to the display form of the action related display (the special operation promotion display 04TM035 corresponds to the action related display 04TM001 in the normal form, and the first The special operation promotion display 04TM035A corresponds to the operation related display 04TM001 in the first special mode, and the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B corresponds to the operation related display 04TM001 in the second special mode, and the third special operation promotion display. 04TM035C corresponds to the operation related display 04TM001 of the third special mode),
When the motion related display is displayed, it is possible to display a motion promotion display having a mode different from the display mode corresponding to the display mode of the motion related display (shown in FIG. 11-17 (15)). Thus, when the operation related display 04TM001 of the second special mode is displayed, it is possible to display the operation promotion display 04TM030 that prompts the user to operate the push button 04TM102B.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to display an operation promotion display that is not related to the display mode of the operation related display, it is possible to increase the variety of the operation promotion display and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means Y9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Y1 to the means Y8,
The operation related display means (production control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation related display (operation related display 04TM001),
Change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120 for execution) capable of executing a change suggestion effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, and third change suggestion effect) suggesting that the display mode of the motion-related display changes. )
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, and third change suggestion effect) as the change suggestion effect,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed, the rate at which the display state of the motion-related display changes varies (as shown in FIG. 11-9, the second change suggestion effect is more preferable than the first change suggestion effect. The rate of change of the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 is high, and the third change suggesting effect changes the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 at a rate of 100%)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of motion-related display by focusing on which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-164504 (FIG. 97), as a gaming machine that produces an effect in response to operation of the operation means, an operation promotion display that prompts the operation means to be operated is displayed on the decorative symbol. There has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a variable display or a stop display, and changes the display mode of the operation promotion display. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-164504 (FIG. 97), there is room for improving the interest of a performance executed by a player's action. The invention relating to the means Z1 to the means Z9 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the effects performed by the player's action.

The gaming machine of means Z1 is
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative display of decorative symbols) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Specific display means (production control CPU 120) capable of displaying a specific display (holding display) corresponding to the variable display;
An action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing an action effect (cut-in notice effect, result notification effect) by the player's action;
Motion related display means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a motion related display (motion related display 04TM001) related to the motion effect,
There are a plurality of modes including a first mode (normal mode) and a second mode (second special mode) as a display mode of the operation-related display,
When the motion-related display is displayed in the second mode, the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the motion-related display is displayed in the first mode (FIG. 11-8 (A)). As shown in the above, the motion-related display in the first special mode to the third special mode has a higher expectation of jackpot than the motion-related display in the normal mode)
The operation related display means can change a display mode of the operation related display, and can display a specific related display related to the specific display when the display mode of the operation related display is changed. It is possible (as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (7) to (10), when the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display is the second specific form (sword shape), the hold display (subject to notice) The third change suggesting effect (sword) is executed when the variable display corresponding to () is executed.If the display mode at the last shift of the hold display is the first specific mode (hammer shape), the hold is performed. The second change suggesting effect (hammer) is executed when the variable display corresponding to the display (subject to notice) is executed.When the display mode at the last shift of the hold display is the normal mode (round shape), The hold indication (subject to notice or not Tell the target) is not executed first change suggested effect (that perform no weapon) or any change suggested effect when the variation display corresponding is executed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by relating the change of the operation-related display and the specific display.

The gaming machine of means Z2 is
A gaming machine of means Z1,
The action effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can display an action promotion display that prompts the player's action in a display mode corresponding to the display mode of the action related display (the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is a normal mode). Corresponding to the motion related display 04TM001, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A corresponds to the motion related display 04TM001 of the first special mode, and the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is the motion related display of the second special mode. 04TM001, the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C corresponds to the operation related display 04TM001 of the third special mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, an interest can be improved by relating the display mode of the action promotion display and the display mode of the action related display.

The gaming machine of means Z3 is
A gaming machine of means Z1 or means Z2,
The motion related display means (production control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the motion related display (motion related display 04TM001), and the motion related display corresponding to one motion effect (result notification effect). Can be changed a plurality of times (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11), the change timing of the first motion-related display 04TM001 is the timing after the start of the variable display (FIG. 11- 14 is the timing after the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice is completed (the timing of T12 shown in FIG. 11-14). Is)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a structure, the opportunity for the display mode of an action-related display to change increases, a player can have a sense of expectation, and an interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Z4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Z1 to the means Z3,
The operation related display means (production control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation related display (operation related display 04TM001),
A first notice effect (first SU notice effect) for notifying that it is controlled to the advantageous state and a second notice effect (second SU notice effect) suggesting that the display mode of the operation-related display changes are executed. A possible notice effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is provided,
At least a part of the first notice effect and the second notice effect are common (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11), the first stage of the first SU notice effect and the second SU notice effect). (Step 1 is a common production mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to which of the first notice effect and the second notice effect is executed, and the interest of the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Z5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Z1 to the means Z4,
The operation related display means (production control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation related display (operation related display 04TM001),
A specific effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not the control is in the advantageous state
The operation related display means (production control CPU 120) displays the operation related display from before the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (1) to 11-17 (13)). The motion-related display 04TM001 is displayed from before the establishment), and the display mode of the motion-related display can be changed before the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11)) Before the state is established, it is possible to change the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 from the normal mode to the first special mode)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player's interest in the motion-related display can be increased and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Z6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Z1 to the means Z5,
The display mode of the operation related display includes a third mode corresponding to the notification that the advantageous state is controlled (as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the final display mode of the operation related display is (In the case of the third special mode [crack (large)], it will be a big hit at a rate of 100%)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the player's interest in the motion-related display can be increased and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Z7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Z1 to the means Z6,
Motion detection means (sphere button 04TM102A) for detecting the player's motion;
Change means (effect control CPU 120) for changing the mode of the motion detection means,
The changing means can change the mode of the motion detecting means in accordance with the display mode of the motion related display (as shown in FIG. 11-17 (19), the second special button of the spherical button 04TM102A). The mode and the second special mode of the motion related display 04TM001 correspond to each other. As shown in FIG. 11-19 (25), the first special mode of the spherical button 04TM102A and the first special mode of the motion related display 04TM001 In addition, the third special mode of the spherical button 04TM102A corresponds to the third special mode of the motion-related display 04TM001.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by providing a relationship between the display mode of the motion related display and the mode of the motion detection means.

The gaming machine of means Z8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Z1 to the means Z7,
The operation effect execution means (effect control CPU 120)
The action promotion display that prompts the player's action can be displayed in a display form corresponding to the display form of the action related display (the special operation promotion display 04TM035 corresponds to the action related display 04TM001 in the normal form, and the first The special operation promotion display 04TM035A corresponds to the operation related display 04TM001 in the first special mode, and the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B corresponds to the operation related display 04TM001 in the second special mode, and the third special operation promotion display. 04TM035C corresponds to the operation related display 04TM001 of the third special mode),
When the motion related display is displayed, it is possible to display a motion promotion display having a mode different from the display mode corresponding to the display mode of the motion related display (shown in FIG. 11-17 (15)). Thus, when the operation related display 04TM001 of the second special mode is displayed, it is possible to display the operation promotion display 04TM030 that prompts the user to operate the push button 04TM102B.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since it is possible to display an operation promotion display that is not related to the display mode of the operation related display, it is possible to increase the variety of the operation promotion display and improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means Z9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means Z1 to the means Z8,
The operation related display means (production control CPU 120) can change the display mode of the operation related display (operation related display 04TM001),
Change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120 for execution) capable of executing a change suggestion effect (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, and third change suggestion effect) suggesting that the display mode of the motion-related display changes. )
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, and third change suggestion effect) as the change suggestion effect,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed, the rate at which the display state of the motion-related display changes varies (as shown in FIG. 11-9, the second change suggestion effect is more preferable than the first change suggestion effect. The rate of change of the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 is high, and the third change suggesting effect changes the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 at a rate of 100%)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of motion-related display by focusing on which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title for notifying the type of reach effect at the start of the reach effect (see, for example, JP-A-2006-101428). In a gaming machine as described in JP-A-2006-101428, it is desired to enhance the effect. The invention according to the means J1 to the means J8 has been made in view of the above-described actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced rendering effects.

The gaming machine according to means J1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, reach effect) that suggests that it is controlled to the advantageous state;
Title informing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggestion effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggestion effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means J2 is the gaming machine of means J1,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects,
In the plurality of types of suggestion effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 8-2 (C)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to focus on which suggestion effect is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means J3 is the gaming machine of means J1 or means J2.
At a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
The execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is notified.

The gaming machine of means J4 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J3.
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach A or Super Reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of Super Reach D or Super Reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notification means may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification effect of the title according to the suggestion effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J5 is the gaming machine of means J4.
You may make it the ratio by which the case where the said 1st suggestion effect is performed is controlled to the said advantageous state is higher than the case where the said 2nd suggestion effect is performed.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J6 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J5.
The suggestion effect executing means may be capable of executing the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J7 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J6.
A detection means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's action;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) that performs specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display executing means includes
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that are more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 8-10 (E), FIG. 8-11 (I )),
In the effective period of detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the second specific display after the change may be executed (for example, FIGS. 8-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the production effect is improved.

The gaming machine of means J8 is the gaming machine of any one of means J1 to means J7.
As a suggestion display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 8-12 (a)). Display and the second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (reach title image 31AK062 of the second size displayed during the reach title production shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), etc.) Means (for example, the image display device 5 and the CPU 120 for effect control),
The display means includes
Plural kinds of elements having different modes (element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) Etc.) can be displayed, and a specific image (such as a fruit pattern shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d)) can be displayed.
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (The shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d) may be displayed so as to include the elements E1 to E5).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that the specific image is displayed.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest related to information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means K1 to the means K7 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest related to information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means K1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (production control CPU 120) for performing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005). ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. Display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
The rate at which the first information mode changes is different from the rate at which the second information mode changes (as shown in FIG. 10-3, the sub-active display 30TM005 is usually the final display mode rather than the active display 30TM003. (The mode in which the mode different from the mode is selected is low, and the display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 is less likely to change than the first hold display 30TM001)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information such as the first information and the second information as information corresponding to the common variable display, thereby improving the interest regarding the information corresponding to the variable display. In addition, the aspect of the first information and the second information can be interested.

The gaming machine of means K2 is
A gaming machine of means K1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 10-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display). The secondary hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the changed information is different between the first information and the second information, so that each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means K3 is
A gaming machine of means K1 or means K2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (sub hold display 30TM004, sub active display) at the same time. (As shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 can be displayed simultaneously),
Depending on the aspect of the first information after the change and the aspect of the second information after the change, the proportion controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, compared to the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. (If you are in a red mode, the big hit expectation is higher)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means K4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
A first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and a first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a manner common to the first hold display (FIGS. 10-9 ( 9) As shown in (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in red mode is shifted to the active display region 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle in red mode) which is the same display color. Shape display)),
The second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, subactive display area 30TM105) and the second display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary holding display area 30TM104, second active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a manner common to the second hold display (FIGS. 10-9 ( 9) As shown in (10), when the secondary display 30TM004c (red star display) in the red mode is shifted to the secondary active display region 30TM105, the secondary active display 30TM005c (the red display in the same display color) is displayed. Star display))
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information such as the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed. While being able to improve, it can be made interested in the aspect of the 1st correspondence information and the 2nd correspondence information.

The gaming machine of means K5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K4,
It is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is being executed. The information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIG. 10-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters “Leach !!”) are displayed at the bottom of the screen. (While the display 30TM003 is not displayed, the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is not displayed to increase the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed, so that the information about the variable display can be confirmed even during the notification effect. Can be possible.

The gaming machine of means K6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K5,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) changes the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). Display a second corresponding display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The mode of effect differs between the first effect produced when the mode of the first corresponding display changes and the second effect produced when the mode of the second corresponding display changes (for example, active The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the action that the character A appears and throws the ball is executed. The sub active action effect that changes the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 is the character that appears. (This is the mode of executing the action of flying balloons)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a structure, an interest can be improved by the aspect of a 1st effect production differing from a 2nd effect production.

The gaming machine of means K7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means K1 to the means K6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and second information. As a second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104),
The rate at which the advantageous state advantageous to the player is controlled differs between when the first hold display mode is changed and when the second hold display mode is changed (as shown in FIG. 10-3). The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and the secondary hold display 30TM004 is higher than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. (If the display mode changes, the big hit expectation is higher)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it can be noted which aspect of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), a gaming machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes as information corresponding to variable display has been proposed. In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-117517 (FIG. 18), there is room for improving the interest related to information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means L1 to the means L7 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest related to information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means L1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (production control CPU 120) for performing display control of information corresponding to variable display (first hold display 30TM001, second hold display 30TM002, active display 30TM003, sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005). ,
The display control means executes display control of the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) corresponding to variable display in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). In the second information display area (sub-hold display area 30TM104, sub-active display area 30TM105) different from the first information display area, the variable display corresponding to the first information and the common variable display are supported. Display control of the second information (sub-hold display 30TM004, sub-active display 30TM005) can be executed,
When the aspect of the first information changes, at least a part of the notice effect in the display area different from the first information display area is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-11, the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001 is (When changed, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104 and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of information such as the first information and the second information as information corresponding to the common variable display, the complication of the production is suppressed and the interest is improved. be able to.

The gaming machine of means L2 is
A gaming machine of means L1,
The mode of the first information after the change is different from the mode of the second information after the change (as shown in FIG. 10-8 (6), the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode is a blue round display). The secondary hold display 30TM004b in blue mode is a blue star display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the changed information is different between the first information and the second information, so that each information can be clearly distinguished and grasped.

The gaming machine of means L3 is
A gaming machine of means L1 or means L2,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can display the first information (first hold display 30TM001, active display 30TM003) and second information (sub hold display 30TM004, sub active display) at the same time. (As shown in FIG. 10-8 (2), the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003, and the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 can be displayed simultaneously),
Depending on the aspect of the first information after the change and the aspect of the second information after the change, the proportion controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (for example, as shown in FIG. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a golden mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, compared to the case where the final display mode of the display 30TM003 is the normal mode and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is the normal mode. (If you are in a red mode, the big hit expectation is higher)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the combination of the aspect of the first information and the aspect of the second information, and the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means L4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L3,
The display control means (production control CPU 120)
A first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information is displayed in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and a first correspondence display (active) corresponding to the variable display being executed Display 30TM003) in the first information display area (active display area 30TM103),
When the variable display corresponding to the first hold display is started, the first corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a manner common to the first hold display (FIGS. 10-9 ( 9) As shown in (10), when the first hold display 30TM001c (red circle display) in red mode is shifted to the active display region 30TM103, the active display 30TM003c (red circle in red mode) which is the same display color. Shape display)),
The second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information is displayed in the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104, subactive display area 30TM105) and the second display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Corresponding display (secondary active display 30TM005) is displayed in the second information display area (secondary holding display area 30TM104, second active display area 30TM105),
When the variable display corresponding to the second hold display is started, the second corresponding display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in a manner common to the second hold display (FIGS. 10-9 ( 9) As shown in (10), when the secondary display 30TM004c (red star display) in the red mode is shifted to the secondary active display region 30TM105, the secondary active display 30TM005c (the red display in the same display color) is displayed. Star display))
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to display a plurality of types of information such as the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information as the information corresponding to the variable display being executed. While being able to improve, it can be made interested in the aspect of the 1st correspondence information and the 2nd correspondence information.

The gaming machine of means L5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L4,
It is provided with a notification effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a notification effect (reach effect) for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player,
At least a part of the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103) is included in the area where the notification effect is executed,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) can hide the first information as the notification effect is executed, while the second information is also displayed when the notification effect is being executed. The information can be visually recognized (as shown in FIG. 10-9 (11), when the reach state is established, the letters “Leach !!”) are displayed at the bottom of the screen. (While the display 30TM003 is not displayed, the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are continuously displayed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the first information is not displayed to increase the attention to the notification effect, and the second information is continuously displayed, so that the information about the variable display can be confirmed even during the notification effect. Can be possible.

The gaming machine of means L6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L5,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) changes the first corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display being executed to the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101, active display area 30TM103). Display a second corresponding display (sub active display 30TM005) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second information display area (sub hold display area 30TM104, sub active display area 30TM105),
The mode of effect differs between the first effect produced when the mode of the first corresponding display changes and the second effect produced when the mode of the second corresponding display changes (for example, active The active action effect that changes the display mode of the display 30TM003 is a mode in which the action that the character A appears and throws the ball is executed. The sub active action effect that changes the display mode of the sub active display 30TM005 is the character that appears. (This is the mode of executing the action of flying balloons)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a structure, an interest can be improved by the aspect of a 1st effect production differing from a 2nd effect production.

The gaming machine of means L7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means L1 to the means L6,
The display control means (production control CPU 120) displays a first hold display (first hold display 30TM001) as first information in the first information display area (first hold display area 30TM101), and second information. As a second hold display (second hold display 30TM004) as the second information display area (second hold display area 30TM104),
The rate at which the advantageous state advantageous to the player is controlled differs between when the first hold display mode is changed and when the second hold display mode is changed (as shown in FIG. 10-3). The big hit expectation is higher when the display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 is changed than when the display mode of the display 30TM003 is changed, and the secondary hold display 30TM004 is higher than when the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed. (If the display mode changes, the big hit expectation is higher)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it can be noted which aspect of the first hold display and the second hold display has changed.

  As shown in JP-A-2006-144583 (FIG. 36), a game machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed each time a pseudo continuous change is executed. Has been. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest related to information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means M1 to M6 is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest related to information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means M1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
A change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes,
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means displays the successful indication of the change suggestion effect (as shown in FIGS. 10-18 (1) and (2)), the ball thrown by the character hits the active display 30TM003. The effect that changes the mode) and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (10) and (20)), the ball thrown by the character is played by the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is not changed. )
In accordance with the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode, within the predetermined period (for example, the period from the start of the change until the reach state is established, the decorative pattern (revariation (pseudo-continuous) is performed after the temporary stop). The next change suggestion effect is within the period until the temporary stop of the decorative pattern combination or pseudo-continuous pattern), within the period from the start of change until the first stop of the left, middle, or right decorative pattern). The executed ratio is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-16, in the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed, if both are successful, the third change is performed at a rate of 100%. If the suggestion effect is executed and once is a success mode and once is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by increasing the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means M2 is
A gaming machine of means M1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the proportion controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the final display of the active display) Expectation of jackpot depends on the mode)
Depending on the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continued, the ratio of which mode the correspondence display becomes is different (as shown in FIG. The greater the number of, the higher the expectation level for jackpots, and the higher the number of consecutive success change suggestive effects even for active display of the same display color, the higher the expectation level for jackpots)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continued, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means M3 is
A gaming machine of means M1 or means M2,
Variable display of decorative designs can be performed,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIG. 10-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of change does not change)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the change suggestive effect more noticeable because the decorative display variable display mode does not change.

The gaming machine of means M4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, different types of change suggestion effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (1), after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears). As shown in FIG. 10-18 (4), a change suggesting effect in which character B appears is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify change suggestion effects.

The gaming machine of means M5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIG. (Character D has a higher rate of execution of change suggestion effect of success mode and higher rate of change of display mode of active display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give interest to which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means M6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means M1 to the means M5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Change suggestion production) can be executed,
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 10-17, the character A is executed by the character A rather than the character D. The ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give interest to which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  As shown in JP-A-2006-144583 (FIG. 36), a game machine is proposed in which an active display is displayed as information corresponding to variable display, and the display mode of the active display is changed each time a pseudo continuous change is executed. Has been. In a gaming machine as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-144583 (FIG. 36), there is room for improving the interest related to information corresponding to variable display. The invention according to the means N1 to N6 is made in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest related to information corresponding to variable display.

The gaming machine of means N1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display of special symbols, decorative display of decorative symbols),
Display control means (effect control CPU 120) capable of displaying a corresponding display (active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display;
A change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a change suggestion effect suggesting that the mode of the corresponding display changes,
As the change suggestion effect, the change suggestion effect execution means hits the active display 30TM003 with the ball thrown by the character A as shown in FIGS. 10-18 (1) and (2). The effect of changing the display mode) and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode (as shown in FIGS. 10-19 (10) and (20)), the ball thrown by the character D is played on the active display 30TM003 and the display mode is changed. Can be performed)
For a predetermined period (for example, during the period from the start of change until the reach state is established, a decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols or a pseudo continuous symbol that will undergo re-variation (pseudo-continuous) after temporary stop) is temporarily In the period until the stop, the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode relative to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the period from the start of the change to the first stop of any decorative symbol of the left middle right Accordingly, the proportion controlled to the advantageous state advantageous to the player is different (as shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode] with respect to [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect]). The higher the ratio, the easier it is to have a display mode with a high degree of expectation of jackpots. For example, the display mode when [the number of executions of the success suggestion effect / the number of executions of the change suggestion effect] is 2/3 Next Display mode when it is 4/5 is more jackpot expected high degree of red aspect.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by increasing the degree of attention to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means N2 is
A gaming machine of means N1,
Depending on the mode of the corresponding display (active display 30TM003), the proportion controlled to the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) varies (as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the big hit expectation degree depends on the final display mode of the active display. Different),
Depending on the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continued, the ratio of which mode the correspondence display becomes is different (as shown in FIG. The greater the number of, the higher the expectation level for jackpots, and the higher the number of consecutive success change suggestive effects even for active display of the same display color, the higher the expectation level for jackpots)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to be interested in the number of times that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continued, and it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means N3 is
A gaming machine of means N1 or means N2,
Variable display of decorative designs can be performed,
When the change suggestion effect is being executed, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not change (as shown in FIG. 10-18, when the change suggestion effect is being executed, the temporary stop is not performed for the variable display of the decorative symbol. The direction of change does not change)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the change suggestive effect more noticeable because the decorative display variable display mode does not change.

The gaming machine of means N4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N3,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) can execute a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears and a change suggestion effect in which character B appears),
After executing one type of change suggestion effect, different types of change suggestion effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (1), after executing the change suggestion effect in which the character A appears). As shown in FIG. 10-18 (4), a change suggesting effect in which character B appears is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify change suggestion effects.

The gaming machine of means N5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N4,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) is a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (for example, a change suggestion effect in which character A appears, a change suggestion effect in which character B appears, a change suggestion effect in which character C appears, Change suggestion effect in which character D appears) can be executed,
Depending on the type of change suggestion effect, the rate at which the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed is different, and the rate of change to the corresponding display of the specific mode is different (for example, as shown in FIG. (Character D has a higher rate of execution of change suggestion effect of success mode and higher rate of change of display mode of active display)
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give interest to which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means N6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means N1 to the means N5,
The change suggestion effect execution means (effect control CPU 120) has a plurality of types of change suggestion effects (change suggestion effect in which character A appears, change suggestion effect in which character B appears, change suggestion effect in which character C appears, and character D. Change suggestion production) can be executed,
The rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the type of change suggestion effect (as shown in FIG. 10-17, the character A is executed by the character A rather than the character D. The ratio is high)
A gaming machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to give interest to which type of change suggestion effect is executed.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. Further, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a “hit signal” or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. For gaming machines such as those described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when the setting value is changed, it is necessary to grasp the control state related to the setting on the external device side However, even if the conventional signal output technology of a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, it is difficult to grasp this on the external device side. is there. The invention relating to the means O1 to the means O4 is made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately notifying the outside of the gaming machine of the control state related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Setting confirmation mode control means (game controlling microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed;
Specific signal output means for outputting a specific signal (security signal) in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the game control microcomputer 100 that outputs a security signal in step S21TM4560); ,
Setting means (game control microcomputer 100 for setting the value of the security signal timer) for setting a value (a value of the security signal timer) relating to a period during which the specific signal is output;
The setting means can set a predetermined value common to the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting check mode is controlled (in step S21TM4710, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). ),
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal at least until a period corresponding to the predetermined value elapses in response to the end of the control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (in the setting confirmation mode). The security signal is continuously output until 1 second has elapsed from the end of the setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have elapsed from the end of the setting change mode. To do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the external device of the state of the gaming machine related to the setting.

The gaming machine of means O2 is
A gaming machine of means O1,
Initializing means for initializing the gaming state (game controlling microcomputer 100 for executing RAM clear (step S21TM1410) based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in step S21TM4050, step S21TM4150),
The initialization means initializes the gaming state in accordance with the control of the setting change mode (when controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared after being controlled to the setting change mode),
The setting means can set a specific value corresponding to a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value after setting the predetermined value (after setting 1 second as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM4710). (When RAM clear is executed, 30 seconds can be set as the value of the security signal timer in step S21TM1465)
The specific signal output means outputs a specific signal until the period corresponding to the specific value elapses in response to the end of the control of the setting change mode (from the end of the setting change mode with the end of the setting change mode) The security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds have passed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the specific signal is output at least during the period corresponding to the predetermined value when the setting change mode control is finished and when the setting confirmation mode control is finished. When the mode is controlled, the specific signal is output for a period longer than the period corresponding to the predetermined value, so that the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are different outputs while sharing the setting process by the setting means. A period can be set.

The gaming machine of means O3 is
A gaming machine of means O1 or means O2,
In the setting change mode, when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (detection that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing the specific information (setting change flag) in the step S21TM4580, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the fact that the setting change mode has been entered in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on this, the game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting changing flag in step S21TM4720 is provided,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, the game is stopped and a specific signal is output (the processing of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off based on the absence of the condition for shifting to the setting change mode). Is possible.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped during the control of the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified to the external device when the power supply is resumed.

The gaming machine of means O4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means O1 to the means O3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means includes
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
In the setting change mode, power supply to the gaming machine is not performed without performing a specific operation for ending the setting change mode (without detecting an operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Specific information storage means for storing specific information when stopped (in the backup area of the RAM 102, the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. Based on the game control microcomputer 100) that clears the setting change flag in step S21TM4720,
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, an error notification can be executed in the display means and an error command can be sent to the effect control means (set value error error command is sent in step S21TM4190, and the display monitor is displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210 21TM029 can display the letter “E”)
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of an operation for changing the set value (“turns on the power after the power is turned off and enters the setting change mode”). Message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the store clerk of the game hall of the state of the gaming machine and to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to appropriately notify the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. The invention relating to the means P1 to the means P4 is made in view of the above situation, and a gaming machine that appropriately notifies the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed. It is to provide.

The gaming machine of means P1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. And a game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) And an error notification means capable of performing error notification (the game control microcomputer 100 that displays an error in step S21TM4210 when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not established). .
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified.

The gaming machine of means P2 is
A gaming machine of means P1,
The setting change mode control means determines that a setting change condition is satisfied (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state, and a clear switch (setting The changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state), and can be controlled to the setting change mode,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) If the setting change condition is satisfied, the setting change mode can be controlled without executing the error notification (when the power is turned on, all of the steps S21TM4120, S21TM4130, and S21TM4140 are performed). Based on the determination of YES, the process proceeds to the setting change mode without proceeding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the condition for controlling the setting change mode is satisfied, the control is performed in the setting change mode without executing the error notification, and it is possible to appropriately set the setting value by avoiding unnecessary error notification. Can prompt change.

The gaming machine of means P3 is
A gaming machine of means P1 or means P2,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, the error notification can be executed and the game can be stopped (if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not established when the power is turned on (any of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140). (If NO is determined in step S2), the process proceeds to the loop process of steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220 without shifting to the setting change mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the progress of the game in a state where the set value is unstable can be limited, and appropriate game control can be realized.

The gaming machine of means P4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means P1 to the means P3,
Game control means for controlling the progress of the game (game control microcomputer 100 for executing game control timer interrupt processing);
Production control means (production control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the production,
The game control means includes
Display means (display monitor 21TM029);
The setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 for executing the processing of steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620);
The specific information storage means,
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (determined that the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored) In this case, it is possible to execute the error notification in the display means and transmit an error command to the effect control means (a set value abnormality error command is transmitted in step S21TM4190 and displayed in the error display in step S21TM4210). It is possible to display the letter “E” on the monitor 21TM029),
In response to receiving the error command, the effect control means notifies the image display device 5 of an operation for changing the set value (“turns on the power after the power is turned off and enters the setting change mode”). Message "Please migrate")
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately notify the store clerk of the game hall of the state of the gaming machine and to prompt an operation for changing the set value.

  In addition, as shown in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), a gaming machine has been proposed that includes setting change means for changing setting values in a plurality of stages based on an external setting change operation. In a gaming machine as described in JP 2010-200902 A (paragraph 0007), when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed, it is necessary to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine. The invention according to the means Q1 to the means Q5 is made in view of the above situation, and provides a gaming machine that appropriately determines the state of the gaming machine when the power supply is stopped when the set value is changed There is to do.

The gaming machine of means Q1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing control according to set values (six levels of set values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination) such as jackpot determination processing in special symbol process processing ,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4620) that can be controlled to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed;
Specific information storage means for storing specific information capable of specifying that the setting change mode has been controlled (the setting change flag is set in step S21TM4580 based on the transition to the setting change mode, and the setting change mode is terminated. And a game control microcomputer 100) for clearing the setting change flag in step S21TM4720 based on the above,
The specific information storage means can store the specific information even after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped (the value of the setting change flag is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102),
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means (the setting changing flag is set in step S21TM4030 when power is restored). When it is determined that it is set, control is made to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on, the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (Setting change-over switch) Regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting change mode that 21TM052 is in the ON state is established, the setting change mode is automatically controlled to the setting change mode.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in the setting change mode that involves initialization of the gaming state, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately determined.
Note that the gaming machine of the means Q1 initializes the gaming state in response to the control of the setting change mode (for example, the RAM based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is set in the steps S21TM4050 and S21TM4150). You may further provide the game control microcomputer 100 which performs clear (step S21TM1410).

The gaming machine of means Q2 is
A gaming machine of means Q1,
The setting change mode control means, based on the fact that the setting change condition is satisfied when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Control is made to the setting change mode (when the setting change flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030), the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state. Yes, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON). Based on the fact that the condition is satisfied, the mode changes to the setting change mode), and the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means. If it is remembered, control is made to the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied (if the setting changing flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030) ), Regardless of whether the conditions for entering the setting change mode are met or not, the setting change mode is automatically controlled)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power interruption occurs during the setting change mode control, the setting change mode is entered even when the setting change condition is not satisfied based on the fact that the specific information is stored when the power is restored. Since it will be controlled, workability | operativity can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q3 is
A gaming machine of means Q1 or means Q2,
The setting change mode control means performs a transition operation when power supply to the gaming machine is started (when the setting changing flag is not set when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM4030)) Is open, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the RAM clear flag is 1 (the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends because the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state) Is set to the setting change mode), and the setting change mode can be controlled based on the fact that the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied. Specific operation (in step S21TM4680, it was confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 was turned off. It is possible to terminate the setting change mode based on the)
The specific information storage means stores the specific information when controlled in the setting change mode (sets a setting changing flag at the timing of step S21TM4580 when control of the setting change mode is started), and performs the specific operation. The setting information is deleted when the setting change mode ends based on (the setting changing flag is cleared at the timing of step S21TM4720 when the control of the setting change mode ends)
The setting change mode control means, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, when the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, regardless of whether the transition operation is performed or not. Control is performed in the setting change mode (when the setting changing flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030)), regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the setting changing mode is satisfied. The setting change mode is automatically controlled), and the setting change mode is ended based on the specific operation (the setting change mode is ended based on confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in step S21TM4680). Let me)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately determine a condition for ending the control of the setting change mode.

The gaming machine of means Q4 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which setting values are stored) for storing setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (such as a big hit determination process in the special symbol process) can be executed,
The set value stored in the set value storage means is changed based on the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in step S21TM4610). Change the setting value stored in the setting value storage area),
The setting change mode control means ends the setting change mode based on a specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled (in step S21TM4680, it is confirmed that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off). To exit the setting change mode based on
The setting value storage means is changed by the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without the specific operation being performed when the setting change mode is controlled. (The set value storage area is formed in the backup area of the RAM 102, and when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode, the set value storage area is stored in the RAM 102). The setting value stored in is changed, so even if the power is turned off during the setting change mode, the setting value after the change operation is retained.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is resumed, the setting value after being changed by the changing operation in the setting changing mode before the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the setting value storage means, and the setting value is changed according to the setting value. Since control is executed, workability can be improved.

The gaming machine of means Q5 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means Q1 to the means Q3,
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which setting values are stored) for storing setting values (six levels of setting values 0 to 5 having different ranges of random numbers for jackpot determination);
Control according to the set value stored in the set value storage means (such as a big hit determination process in the special symbol process) can be executed,
The setting change mode control means is stored in the setting value storage area when the change operation when the setting change mode is controlled (when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated in the setting change mode). Only the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage means is changed based on the specific operation after the changing operation. The setting change mode is terminated (based on the confirmation that the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off in the setting change mode, the setting value stored at that time in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area. To confirm the effective setting value and exit the setting change mode)
The setting value storage means performs the change operation in the setting change mode when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation when the setting change mode is controlled. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area is stored unless the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off even when the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated during the setting change mode. (If the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the setting value before being controlled in the setting change mode is retained.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a figure showing an example of production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a timing diagram which shows the output period of a security signal. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of alerting | reporting when the setting change flag is set at the time of power activation. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a game control main process. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs before the set value is confirmed, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a control when a power interruption occurs after the set value is confirmed. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. (1)-(3) is explanatory drawing which shows the production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect, (4) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the production | presentation aspect of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a hold display and an active display. It is a flowchart which shows a change effect determination process. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table for 1st change effect determination, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table for 2nd change effect determination. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending | holding change pattern in a 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending | holding change pattern in a 1st change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pending | holding change pattern in a 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the 1st change production and the 2nd change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding a 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect regarding a 1st change production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the effect aspect regarding a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern of an active display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the kind of change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production | presentation aspect of a change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production | presentation aspect of a change suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example regarding the production | presentation aspect of a change suggestion production. It is a top view which shows the spherical button of this embodiment. It is AA sectional drawing of Drawing 11-1, and is a figure showing the state where the division hemisphere is in a fully closed state. It is a BB sectional view of Drawing 11-2. FIG. 11B is a view corresponding to FIG. 11-2 illustrating a state where the split hemisphere is in a fully open state. It is operation | movement explanatory drawing which shows the change of the open state of a division | segmentation hemisphere. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a hold display and an operation related display. It is a flowchart which shows a change suggestion effect determination process. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the final display mode determination table of operation related display, (B), (C), (D) and (E) are explanatory drawings which show the change pattern determination table of operation related display. is there. (F) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the aspect of the 1st change suggestion effect, (G) is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the aspect of the 2nd change suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of a hold display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table for determining the change pattern of a hold display. It is a flowchart which shows the production determination process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. (L) and (M) are explanatory diagrams showing a table for determining whether or not to execute the SU notice effect, (N) is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode determination table for the first SU notice effect, and (O) FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a cut-in notice effect determination table. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the case of performing a change suggestion production twice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect in the case of performing a change suggestion effect twice, or when performing a change suggestion effect once. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect in the case of performing a change suggestion effect twice, or when performing a change suggestion effect once. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect in the case of performing a change suggestion effect twice. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of each production in the case of performing a change suggestion production once. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the effect aspect in the case of performing a change suggestion effect once. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect in case the display aspect of a motion relevant display becomes a 3rd special aspect.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable blade piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting ball). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. A normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The release state includes an elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds), and a timing until the number of game balls that have entered the winning prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It continues until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. One cycle in which the grand prize opening is in an open state is called a round (round game). In the big hit gaming state, it can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or twice).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on them Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy-low base state, and so on. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 This may be performed by turning on / off the light, and the operation of the movable body 32.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probable big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state is finished, In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  A board other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 is also referred to as a sub board. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpot), start information (startup) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko machine 1 Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) are output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on “per-game” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of ordinary symbols is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process in step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When a start winning is generated, a display result (including a jackpot type) and a random value for determining a variation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination are performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is determined based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. The special game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic fluctuation time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as the presence or absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. This includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the probability variation state is being controlled and the end of the count-off is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot to be open based on the display result being “hit”. It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big prize opening is in an open state has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, while when the round execution count has reached the upper limit execution count, The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit ending process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing is ended.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. This small hit opening process is the timing to return the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state and the measured elapsed time. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and awaits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. Moreover, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the presentation control command etc. which were transmitted from the main board | substrate 11 are performed about the control content of presentation operation | movement using various production | presentation apparatuses.

  Following the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold storage number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols in the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command is received from the main board 11 for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. It is updated to 7 ″, and the big hit effect processing is finished.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbols are stopped in response to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation regarding the feature 31AK)
Next, the characteristic part 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 8-1 is a figure for demonstrating the variation pattern and the kind of reach in the pachinko game machine 1 of this Embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the non-reach losing variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. -2, the variation pattern PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is “lost”. Fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like are prepared.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect suggesting that the reach effect is controlled. As shown by the number of black stars in FIG. 8-1 (B), the reliability when each reach is executed (normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super). Reach B <super reach A in order. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, super reach is executed via normal reach. Further, during the reach production of the super reach, the development production that develops (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 and the like, such as variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 shown in FIG. 8A, are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Although FIG. 8-1 (A) shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to a superreach level one level higher, a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, except for the normal reach with the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability in the super reach is notified of the reach title only by display, and the title of the other super reach is notified by display and voice. In this way, the notification of the title is executed by more production devices in the reach with high reliability than the reach with low reliability. Thereby, a player's expectation can be effectively spoken, and the production effect is improved. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or regardless of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the fonts of the title characters (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typefaces (lines, fonts, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach.

  The notification of the reach title (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the effect content of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the operation of the feature 31AK)
Subsequently, an example of the effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following effect operation is executed by the effect control CPU 120 executing effect control process processing based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 8-2 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (B), the decorative symbols indicating the numbers 7 on the “left” and “right” are stopped to reach a reach mode. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001, which is a teammate character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of super reach production, such as when the introduction of super reach production (also referred to as super reach production) ends, as shown in FIG. The Super Reach A title 31AK002 (here “SP Reach A” characters) is displayed on the entire screen, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name (here “Super Reach A”) is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is notified. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), the enemy character 31AK003 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed. Subsequent portions of the reach production of Super Reach A that are confronted are executed. An effect in which characters confront each other is also called a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a teammate character wins, the game is a big hit, and if a teammate character loses, the game is lost.

  In addition, when displaying a line on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, a sound corresponding to the line may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the lines are not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 8-2 (E), and may be displayed as subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the start of the super reach effect, such as when the introduction of the super reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (In this case, the characters “SP reach B”) and the audio corresponding to the title name of the reach (here “super reach B”) are output from the speaker 8, so that the title of the super reach B is Informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 8-2 (G), the enemy character 31AK006 is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed. Subsequent portions of the reach production of Super Reach B that confront each other are executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the reach title is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super reach production. By doing in this way, since the title can be notified after showing the introduction portion of the super reach effect to the player, etc., the effect effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Further, super reach A (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 8-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) Then, in the introductory part until the title is notified, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 8-2 (C)). By doing in this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach is made after the super reach production is started and which title is notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to making the production mode until the title is notified completely common, and it is possible to determine which super-reach is to be determined if the production is closely watched. You may make it make a part into a common production | presentation aspect. For example, in the introduction part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing in this way, the production effect is improved and the player pays attention to the production. As described above, the title notification may be executed after it is possible to specify which super reach is to be made.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of the super reach D, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the super reach D title 31AK007 (here, the letters “SP reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5. At the same time, a sound corresponding to the title name of the reach (here, “defeat the enemy”) is output from the speaker 8, thereby informing the title of the super reach D. Thus, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production. Further, below the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion display 31AK008 indicating the expectation degree of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. Here, the expectation degree is an expectation degree that is a big hit, but it does not have to completely coincide with the reach big hit reliability.

  Note that the super-reach D audio notification does not notify the title name as it is, but notifies the contents of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the voice title notification is varied depending on the type of reach. Thereby, the notification mode of a title alert | report becomes various and an interest improves.

  After the title is notified in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestion display 31AK008 are continuously reduced and displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing in this way, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of reach even during reach production. In FIG. 8-2 (I), the contents of the effects common to FIG. 8-2 (C) (super reach A and super reach B) are shown, but the super reach effects dedicated to super reach D are executed. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach D where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 are confronted. Executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (A), the title 31AK010 (here, “SP reach E”) of super reach E is displayed on a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. As a result, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In Super Reach E, the title is not notified by voice. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of Super Reach E where the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is displayed. Executed. Thus, in the super reach E, the title is notified together with the progress of the reach production. In Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during reach production.

  In the reach production of Super Reach E with a low jackpot reliability, it is possible to prevent giving a player an excessive sense of expectation by performing the title notification without stopping the progress of the reach production. On the other hand, in the reach production of Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach D, the progress of the reach production is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 8-2 (D) and (F)). (H)). By doing in this way, the title notification according to the super reach production can be executed and the production effect is improved. Note that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach in super reach production such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the reach production of the super reach with high hit reliability, the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach production of the super reach with low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach production may be stopped and the title notification may be performed.

(Title notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach Production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach Production. The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B with high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach with low jackpot reliability. In E, the title is notified at the start of the super reach production, but the title is notified at the start of the super reach production when the reach is high and the super hit is low. The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
In this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is notified. The title is notified on a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, the title alert | report according to reach production can be performed and production effect improves. In particular, in the case of a reach with high hit reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in the case of a reach with low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be one in which the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the title is displayed there with the entire background as the background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. In addition, the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, and the display area where the title notification is performed may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high hit reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in the case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, in the case where the display area for performing the title notification is varied according to the reach effect, the display area may be varied as in this embodiment, or the display location may be varied.

(Expectation indication)
In this embodiment, in the supervision A and superreach B title notifications with high jackpot reliability, the superleach D having a lower jackpot reliability than superreach A and superreach B without displaying an expectation indication. In the title notification in, an expectation indication is displayed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that an effect becomes dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E having a lower hit reliability than Super Reach D, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from losing a sense of expectation by displaying an expectation indication indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation indication may be displayed in at least a part of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach E.

  Note that the degree of expectation indication is not limited to that indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by a meter or gauge. A numerical value corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 8-2 (H) or the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, the number of stages of expectation may be increased so that half black (half) black stars can be displayed. .

(Title display end timing)
In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in super reach A and super reach B, attention can be paid to reach production. In Super Reach D and Super Reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a decision effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the kind of reach can be grasped even during super reach production. In addition, by performing as described above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily because any effect can be achieved.

  In addition, although the production operation of the reach effect of Super Reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification or expectation suggestion display corresponding to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decisive production)
After each reach effect is executed, when it is time to derive the display result (the final stage of variable display), a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a “big hit” is executed. The decision effect includes a decision effect indicating that the display result is “big hit” and a decision effect indicating that the display result is “lost”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a decision effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is “big hit”, an image 31AK013 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-3 (C), and as shown in FIG. 8-3 (D), A definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived. If the display result is “losing”, an image indicating that the teammate character has been defeated is displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified even during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the determined effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a well-defined title notification can be executed.

  8-2 and 8-3, while the reach effect of super reach, the decorative design is reduced in the lower right part of the image display device 5 and variable display is executed. The method of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach production may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative pattern may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be varied depending on the type of reach effect.

  In addition, when displaying on-screen display, active display, character resident display during variable display, and mobile-related display, the image display device 5 is appropriately hidden during the super-reach reach effect in order to focus on the reach effect. It is good. At this time, during the low-reliability reach production such as Super Reach E, these displays may be kept displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from expecting excessively due to the low-reliability reach effect, and it is possible to focus attention on the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development production)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), when the development effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect that the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn is executed. Thereafter, in the case of developing to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the title of super reach A is notified and the reach effect of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing to super reach B, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (D), the title of super reach B is notified and the reach effect of super reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. As shown in FIG. 8-4, when the development reach is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), and may be an effect that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or a sandstorm (display that appears to be broken). You may make it display. By making such an effect, an unexpected effect can be executed. Note that there may be a development effect such as an effect that the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the example of the effect operation shown in FIG. 8-2 (H), the black star indicating the degree of expectation is displayed from the beginning in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008, but first, five white stars are displayed, An expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star may be executed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (A), when the title of Super Reach D is notified, first, five white star expectation indications 31AK021 are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars on the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise every time it is repeated (every number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation suggestion effect has ended.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is increased by one level. Two or more may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half of the black stars may be displayed and the expectation level may be increased by half. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars to be displayed (the number of steps of the expected degree of increase). For example, the same sound may be output when a half black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing in this way, expectation suggestion production becomes various and production effect improves. Note that the same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectation that increase at a time, fits into the white stars in the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars increases according to the number of stages of expected increase Such an effect may be executed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, character, motif, sound output from the speaker 8 and the like displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of variable displays and the game state, or may be changeable by the player's operation.

  FIGS. 8-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the presentation operation of the title notification and the degree of expectation suggestion when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the presentation mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 8-5 (A) to (F), the title notification and the expected degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the variation pattern of the super reach D is the reach effect of the super reach D2, which is different from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the variation pattern of the super reach D is designated, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (G), the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, audio corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but audio different from the normal mode (for example, audio having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestion display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and expected. An effect that fits in one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 8-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the expected degree of reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation is accommodated in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, the black rhombus is highlighted as shown in FIG. 8-5 (L). In this way, depending on the presentation mode (the state when the reach presentation is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the gaming state, etc., the presentation can be varied and the presentation effect can be varied by changing the notification mode of the title. improves.

  FIG. 8-5 shows an example of the effect operation when the variation pattern of the super reach D is specified, but other reach effects (title notification, expectation degree) depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed). You may make it vary the production | presentation aspect of a suggestion production | generation). Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether or not the reach title is notified or the execution rate of the title notification may be varied. For example, when a predetermined production mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the production according to the player's preference can be executed and the production effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the expectation degree is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation degree suggestion display, and the expectation suggestion effect that increases the number of black stars stepwise is executed. An expectation suggestion effect that reduces the number of displays suggesting stepwise may be executed. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the expectation suggestion effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect that increases the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level indication step by step, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), after the title of Super Reach D is notified and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), image display is performed. The development effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when an operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the title 31AK032 (here, the letters “SP reach C”) of the super reach C is displayed. The title of Super Reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, which makes it easy to understand which reach has been developed. Further, below the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestion display 31AK033 in which the number of black stars is three is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by 2 or more, it is displayed at once. In addition, after the movable body 32 operates, the development effect in which the title and the degree of expectation suggestion change may be executed.

(Notice production)
In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a title notice for notifying the reliability of a big hit is executed according to a notification mode of a title (for example, a display color of a title). For example, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the Super Reach A title 31AK036 is displayed in black, and the audio corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, whereby the Super Reach A title. Is notified, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). Thus, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title preview shown in FIG. 8-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the title display.

  In addition, when a title notice that changes the display mode (display color) of the title is executed, after the display mode of the title is changed, sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing in this way, the effect of a notice effect can be enhanced. Moreover, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Title notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title being reached is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of the effect (specific effect) that improves the degree of expectation controlled to the big hit advantageous state, such as the notice effect or the development effect. In this way, once the title is informed, an effect that improves the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 8-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect determination process for determining the presence / absence of the notice effect and the effect mode. The notice effect determining process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process in step S171 of FIG. In the notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a variation pattern of super reach (step 31AKS001).

  If the change pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 31 AKS 001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not the title notice is executed) is determined (step 31 AKS 002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super reach title is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A), depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “lost”. As shown in Fig. 8-9 (A), the display color of Super Reach titles changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and from "black" to "fruit pattern" A changing thing, a thing changing from "red" to "fruit pattern" is provided, and the big hit reliability is high in this order (ascending order). That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the title. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of a title, and a production effect improves.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title text is displayed in bold and the text itself is “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area is “fruit pattern”. . There may be a pattern displayed as “fruit pattern” from the beginning. For the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may vary depending on the type of super reach. In the case of super reach with a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided to determine any of the changing timings. In the case of a super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of timings to be changed may be one or less than that of a super reach with a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the production mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by changing the execution mode of the title notice (display color and display color change timing) depending on the effect mode, the effects become more diverse and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, a serif notice that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed as the notice effect according to the display mode (for example, the display color of the words) of the characters in the reach effect of the super reach.

  After determining the display color of the super-reach title, the display color of the character's speech in the super-reach reach effect (whether or not to execute the speech advance notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the lines in the reach effect is determined at a determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), for example, depending on whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As shown in FIG. 8-9 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach production are “white”, “red”, and those that change from “white” to “red”, and this order (ascending order) ) Is a big hit reliability. That is, the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing of the display color of the lines. By doing in this way, a player comes to pay attention to the change timing of the display color of words, and the production effect improves. For the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the line is displayed. For the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  Further, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the line notice. For example, when the same notice mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the line notice, the jackpot reliability may be increased when the same notice form is obtained. Also, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the combination of the change timing of the production mode of the title notice and the line notice. For example, the big hit reliability may be higher when the change timing is the same than when the change timing is different, or the big hit reliability may be different depending on which change is first. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change timings of the title notice and the line notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the lines may be determined in a ratio different from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  In addition, it may replace with serif notice and may be made to perform the notice effect which notifies a big hit reliability by the change of the effect aspect of reach production. In that case, in the notice effect, a plurality of effect mode change timings may be provided so that the jackpot reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After determining the display color of the line in the reach effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not a super reach variation pattern (step AK31S001; No), the presence / absence of execution and the effect mode are determined for other notice effects (step AK31S004). Thereafter, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the notice effect determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the title notice and the serif notice can be executed in the case of super reach. However, in the case of a specific super reach (for example, other than the super-reliable super reach), the title notice is provided. And at least one of the serif notices may be made executable. In addition, although the title notice and the line notice have been described as being determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-9, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, the determination ratio may vary depending on the type of super reach. Good. By doing in this way, the notice effect according to the kind of reach can be performed, and the production effect improves.

  In this embodiment, the number of performance modes that can be executed (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the line notice. By doing in this way, the production becomes various and the production effect is enhanced. In the title notice and the serif notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing in this way, a unified notice effect can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
An effect indicating that the effect mode changes may be executed when the effect mode of the title notice and the line notice change. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an action effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. And after an effect production | presentation is performed, you may make it a production | presentation aspect (display color) of a title or a line change. The effect mode (action effect image or the like) of the action effect may be the same regardless of whether it acts on the title or the speech. There may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the line does not change even though the effect effect is executed. When the action effect is executed, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the line notice. Such a determination may be executed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, according to the production mode of the action effect, the rate at which at least one production mode of the title notice and the serif notice changes (the rate at which the production mode changes due to the action effect) may be different. The rate of change in which direction of appearance changes (the rate of which acts) may be different, and the rate of change in which color (how many steps) may be different. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title and the line will act when the action effect image is displayed, and the effect is improved. In addition, when there exist several production | presentation modes, you may make it determine the presence or absence of execution of an effect production, and the production | presentation aspect at a different ratio according to production | presentation mode. By doing in this way, the effect production according to production mode can be performed and production effect improves.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either a title or a line depending on the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the action content of the character or the effect content in the battle effect). May be changed. By doing in this way, the player comes to pay attention to the contents of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above-described characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all the characteristic portions described in the above embodiment are not essential components and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3. Here, although expressed as a sub liquid crystal, the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, the title notification may be executed on the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and super reach E in the above embodiment, when the title is continuously displayed even after the title is notified, the title and the expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the title is notified on the image display device 5, the title or expectation indication may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. By doing in this way, a title and an expectation suggestion display which can display a title and an expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach production in the image display device 5 are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the present invention is applied to the notification of the title of the reach effect as the suggestion effect has been described, but the present invention is applied to the title notification (notification that mainly displays characters) related to other effects. May be. For example, in the case where a pre-read zone effect for shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) having different background images and effect modes in the image display device 5 is executed as the notice effect (for example, the pre-read notice effect), the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When presenting a mission (such as “Reach with 7”, “Defeat all enemies using a stick controller”) and executing a mission effect that will be advantageous to the player when the mission is achieved, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of the characteristic part 31AK)
In the above embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a decision effect for informing whether or not the display result is “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is shown ( FIG. 8-3 (B) to (D)). Instead of such a determined effect, when a predetermined timing is reached before the display result is derived, an operation effect that prompts the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and a predetermined operation is detected during the operation effective period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the result of battle effect or by temporarily stopping the display result. By doing in this way, since a display result is shown according to a player's operation, a player's willingness to participate in a game can be raised and interest is improved.

  8-10 and FIGS. 8-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of super reach effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), after reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), a character 31AK041 that is an ally character and a character that is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 8-11 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), a small button image 31AK043 and a restriction line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed in the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, although the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, it is suggested that the acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of types of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is executed are prepared. The big hit reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a more reliable mode.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 8-10 (E), the praying character 31AK045 is changed to a happy character 31AK046, and a small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to a large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. An effect 31AK050 in which a bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to a stick image 31AK051.

  Thus, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, an effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. Note that the operation effect image may change without an action effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the action effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of action effect.

  Thereafter, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (J), the restriction line 31AK044 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 8-11 (K), the stick image 31AK051 is in the central portion. And a display prompting an operation to pull the stick controller 31A. Further, at this time, an operation effective period in which the operation to the stick controller 31A is effective.

  When an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the teammate character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (L). Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (M), a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination is derived at the timing when the variation time ends. If no operation is detected within a predetermined operation effective period, the image shown in FIG. 8-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as the operation effect image, and when the operation effect using these images is executed in the order of the small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even if an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation effect image with high reliability during reach production, so the production effect is improved and the player's expectation is also improved. Can be maintained.

  8-10 and 8-11, the reach title notification and the expectation suggestion display are omitted, but the reach effects shown in FIGS. 8-10 and 8-11 are omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination relating to the operation effect or the operation effect image (the presence / absence of the operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the presence / absence of the action effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modification 2 of the characteristic part 31AK)
You may make it perform the suggestion display which suggests the expectation degree of control to advantageous states, such as a big hit game state. For example, the shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and the reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with the shutter display after the variable display is started is executed. In the reach title effect, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating the development destination of the reach effect after the reach is executed. There are cases where a specific image is included and displayed when any one of the shutter display and the reach title display is displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title notice in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image of element E1, a melon image of element E2, an apple image of element E3, a watermelon image of element E4, and a strawberry image of element E5. A fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the display size difference between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display.

  When a shutter effect is executed after the start of variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. Further, when the reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image not including the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the big hit reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <blue image <red image <fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the big hit reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red letter reach title). Then, any one image pattern may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When a fruit pattern is displayed during shutter display and reach title display, a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) by the speaker 8 and a notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 are performed. By the light emission control of the common sound and game effect lamp 9, the player is shown that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 8-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (a), when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed, and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (b), variable display of decorative symbols is started. A downward arrow indicates variable display of the left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (d), the super reach production is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are shown as a reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, in the reach title image 31AK062, characters “battle reach” indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, notification that outputs a common sound (melody) from the speaker 8 is executed and notification by light emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is performed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the big hit reliability is high, such as “Atsuiatsui”. Here, the size of the suggestion display displayed in the reach title effect is smaller than that in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting a specific sound, it can be made easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the case where the output period of the common sound and the specific sound is completely separated has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 8-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the teammate character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters “Battle Victory!” Are displayed in the upper left of the screen. It is informed that the big hit has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen with the original number design. As shown in FIG. 8-12 (f), all symbols are stopped and a big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately tell that a fruit pattern image having a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  Also, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noted.

  Also, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 8-12 (a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 8-12 (d) are displayed at different timings. If it does in this way, it can prevent that the fruit pattern image which is a specific image becomes difficult to see by the execution timing overlapping.

  The determination relating to the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8. In that case, the determination related to the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 of FIG. 8-8. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, a fruit pattern shutter effect may be easily performed. Further, the determination related to the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 8-8 together with the determination related to the shutter effect.

[Explanation regarding the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic part 21TM will be described. Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and the effect control board 12 is connected to various effect devices such as the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9, but these are omitted in FIG.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being accommodated in the board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. Various circuits for control are installed. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. The display of fluctuation of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 is performed. It also has a function to control.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be seen from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 stores various winning information related to winning. It also has a display function. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 incorporates various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from the gaming control microcomputer 100 and various gaming ball detection switches. A switch circuit 110 for transmitting to 100 and an information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the terminal board 21TM016 are mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, the main board 11 shown in FIG. 9A is sealed in a board case 21TM201 made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and a display monitor 21TM029 is placed at the center of the main board 11. (For example, 7 segments) is arranged, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 9-1) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided at the lower center of the back surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 is not visible when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made common.

  In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) includes each prize opening (large prize winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning prize opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as “entrance area”. The total number of game balls entering (also referred to as) is counted, and various winning information such as run ratio and role ratio is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. In this way, it is possible to confirm various winning information such as a connection ratio and a role ratio after installation in the amusement hall. That is, it is normal for the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to design the game board surface so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (passes the test). Further, when the test is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment is performed and, as a result of the adjustment, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening as frequently as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustment has been made after the installation in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The power supply board is enclosed in a substrate case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (outtake rate) to be described later is changed at the lower right side of the back of the power supply board. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 and a power switch 21TM055 functioning as setting switches are provided. A game shop clerk or the like operates the power switch 21TM055 in a state in which the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that each board such as the main board 11, the effect control board 12, and the payout control board 21TM037 is predetermined. Operating voltage is supplied. Further, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation can be easily performed.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Therefore, only a store clerk possessing a predetermined key can operate. Further, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires a key operation, only a store clerk possessing a key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated among the store clerk of the game store. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can be switched ON and OFF by a predetermined key. The switch 21TM051 can execute the switching operation and execute an operation (for example, a pushing operation) different from the switching operation. Possible switch may be used.

  Note that the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain an ON state or an OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can be maintained in the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like in the game hall. Further, the lock switch 21TM051 is configured such that the key can be inserted / removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the game shop clerk or the like has to turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key, so the game shop clerk or the like leaves the lock switch 21TM051 in the ON state. Can be prevented.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used for discharging the game balls that have won the prize winning holes and the game balls that have entered the out slot to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a released game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-described switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. LED control commands used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 9-2 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 9-2, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted on the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and incorporates at least a RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by a payout control CPU 21TM371, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and then output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  Further, on the payout control board 21TM037, as shown in FIG. 9-2, a gaming machine frame opening sensor that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2 and a front surface of the gaming board 2 can be opened and closed. A gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided with a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a covering is connected, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. (Error) is also determined. Note that the detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, whereby a payout control microcomputer. 21TM370 can distinguish and recognize the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor composed of a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect a clogged game ball, that is, a so-called ball bite. . In the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037, the detection signal from the ball short switch 21TM187 indicates a full ball state, or the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a low level with respect to the launch board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball launch from the hitting ball launcher. A full tank signal is output. The launch motor signal output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. The firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full tank signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 incorporates a serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals to / from the game control microcomputer 100 through serial communication. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are connected between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signal and reception ACK signal) are exchanged (transmitted / received) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When receiving a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, transmits a signal (reception ACK signal) to that effect to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are placed at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal by putting specific data on the prize ball request signal and the reception ACK signal. It is configured to exchange specific data with. For example, when a winning occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of the winning ball request signal, and the award for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the winning ball payout operation ends, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the winning ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the received ACK signal with the setting is played. It transmits to the microcomputer 100 for control. In addition, when a predetermined error (an error such as ball lending, full tank, or out of ball) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and the setting is The received reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of balls to be lapped through an output port 21TM372b to a terminal board (frame external terminal board and board external terminal board). Output to 21TM160. Although a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, it is not shown in FIG. 9-2.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 by the 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing lighting / extinguishing is output to the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball cut LED 21TM054 via the output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism portion of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. A driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is not shown in FIG. 9-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected with a frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063.

  In response to the player's operation, the card board 21TM050 receives a ball switch signal indicating that the ball switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated. . Further, a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending possible display signal are provided from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the dispensing control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066 as shown in FIG. 9-2.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines whether the card unit 21TM050 is connected or not based on the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received in the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to give the player a predetermined number of rental balls. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to fall. Thereafter, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100 on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, the prize ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided on the AC24V power supply line for the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. It is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (outtake rate) of jackpot changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process described later, the winning probability (outtake rate) of the jackpot is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. . The set value consists of 6 levels 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and as the value decreases in order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases stepwise.

  FIGS. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the setting values. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variation special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to fluctuation display, and the variation special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). In other words, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is the subject of variable display, a determination value for jackpot is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, when the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the variable display target. If the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”, then the jackpot will be won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set value is “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, “6”. ing. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 is used, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. Winning a big hit with a higher probability (1/280) than in some cases. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, A big hit is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of “2”. When the variation special figure designation buffer is the second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the decision value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 4 is used and the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/250) than the cases of “2” and “3”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/250) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/235) than the cases of “2”, “3”, and “4”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/235) as when the first special symbol is displayed as a variable display target.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (F), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5 is used, if the variation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The winner is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”. Further, when the variation special figure designation buffer is second, the same determination value as that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is first is set as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Even if is displayed as a variable display target, the jackpot is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is a variable display target.

  In other words, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the MR1 value corresponds to any one of the jackpots shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). When the winning judgment value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). In other words, the big win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. Note that the “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (F). Separately, jackpot determination is performed using a common table for the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special symbol designation buffer. Also good.

  In the present embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The setting value that can be set to may be 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 9-5, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, and then executes the game control main process after step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, the process waits until the effect control board 12 starts operating (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (such as CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050), and then stores the RAM 102. An accessible state is set (step S21TM1060). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value of the specific register (I register) (1 byte) built in the CPU 103 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  As shown in FIG. 9-6, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 checks the data in the backup RAM area after the power is turned on (step S21TM4010). This process performs a parity check as a data check.

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value, for example, any one of 0 to 5. Is confirmed (step S21TM4020). In this example, as the setting values stored in the setting value storage area, six numbers 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are regular values, and six setting values having different jackpot probabilities are provided. ing. The setting value 0 in this example corresponds to the setting value 1 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like, and the setting value 1 in this example corresponds to the setting value 2 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like. The value 2 corresponds to the setting value 3 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like. The setting value 3 in this example corresponds to the setting value 4 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like. The setting value 5 in this example corresponds to the setting value 6 shown in FIG. 9-4 and the like described above.

  Here, in this example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shipped from the gaming machine manufacturer (before being installed in the game hall), the value with the lowest jackpot probability among the regular values is stored in the set value storage area. (0 in this example) is stored. If the data in the set value storage area is broken, it may not be a regular value. If the set value is a regular value (YES in step S21TM4020), it is confirmed whether a setting change flag is set (step S21TM4030). The setting changing flag is set when the mode is changed to a setting changing mode described later (step S21TM4580) and cleared when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state (step S21TM4720).

  If the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4040).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4050). The value of the RAM clear flag is a value indicating whether or not the RAM clear (game state initialization) is determined to be executed. When the value is 1, the RAM clear is determined to be executed. It has been shown. In this example, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the RAM clear is not actually executed, and when the setting change mode is controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the processing related to the setting change mode is completed. Will be.

  The area where the value of the RAM clear flag is stored is not included in the backup RAM area. For this reason, when the power is cut off, the value of the RAM clear flag is not held, and the value of the RAM clear flag when the power is restored is 0 (initial value is not set). Note that the notification that the gaming state is initialized may be performed before the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and as described later, after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends. It may be performed.

  On the other hand, if clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4060.

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open (step S21TM4060). Here, as described above, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the gaming machine frame / door frame opened. A detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected are output from the sensor 21TM300 to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 recognizes that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, it notifies the gaming control microcomputer 100 that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected, When recognizing that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected, the game control microcomputer 100 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that the open state of the glass door frame 3a has been detected. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  The gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects a detection signal indicating that the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 has been detected for the gaming control microcomputer 100, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a. When the detection signal indicating that this is output (that is, when the gaming control microcomputer 100 includes the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300), the gaming control microcomputer 100 By inputting the detection signal, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be individually recognized.

  When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4060), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4070). . If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), the process proceeds to the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode shown in FIG. 9-7. The setting value can be confirmed and changed when the setting change mode is entered, and the setting value can be confirmed when the setting confirmation mode is entered.

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the set value is a normal value (YES in step S21TM4020), and the power is not cut off during the setting change ( If the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4060) and the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4070), Or confirmation is possible. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 3 is in the closed state (NO in step S21TM4060) or the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is selected? Without being controlled by the mode, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later.

  In the present embodiment, in order to obtain a state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed although the change of the setting value is not permitted, (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, (2 ) Two conditions that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state are necessary. The CPU 103 can check the set value when it is confirmed that both of the conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied by the determination processing in steps S21TM4060 and S21TM4070 (setting check) Mode). In addition to the conditions (1) and (2), the RAM clear flag is set based on the determination that (3) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES). On the condition that this is done, it is possible to shift to a state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed, as will be described later.

  As described above, the lock switch 21TM051 that must be operated in order to confirm or change the set value is provided on the back side of the gaming board 2, and is operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. I can't. If the lock switch 21TM051 is operated even though the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, it means that the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 has an abnormality or some illegal The setting value may be confirmed or changed by the means. In such a state, since it is inappropriate to allow the setting value to be confirmed or changed, in the present embodiment, when the gaming machine frame 3 is not in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode. In addition, neither the setting change mode nor the setting change mode is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, as the condition (1), when either the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set to the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode. Although it is possible to control, the present invention is not limited to such a form. Even if the glass door frame 3a is in an open state, if the gaming machine frame 3 is not in an open state, a setting confirmation mode and a setting change mode Any of these may be controlled.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4060 (NO in step S21TM4060), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. If it is in the closed state, the process proceeds to step S21TM4760 (transmission of setting command) described later without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, when it is confirmed in step S21TM4070 that the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4070), step S21TM4760, which will be described later, is controlled without being controlled by either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Move to (Send Setting Command).

  In the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), if the check result is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120. In the check of the value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4020), if the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4020), the CPU 103 Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. In the setting change flag check (step S21TM4030), if it is confirmed that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4120.

  Here, even if a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area, if a part of the backup RAM area is broken, NO is determined in step S21TM4010. Then, the process proceeds to step S21TM4120. That is, when there is a possibility that the value stored in the set value storage area is inappropriate, the setting change is performed based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be controlled by the mode. In addition, in the data check of the backup RAM area (step S21TM4010), even if the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area. (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. If the setting change mode was controlled when the previous power failure occurred, the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that a setting change mode transition condition (steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 described later) is satisfied. It will be.

  In step S21TM4120, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in an open state (step S21TM4120). When the CPU 103 recognizes the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a (YES in step S21TM4120), it is confirmed whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (step S21TM4130). .

  If lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), CPU 103 checks whether clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140).

  If clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140), CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 (step S21TM4150). And the process after step S21TM4510 relevant to the setting change mode shown to FIGS. 9-7 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the opened state of the glass door frame 3a is not recognized in step S21TM4120 (NO in step S21TM4120), that is, both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both. When it is in the closed state, when the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned on at step S21TM4130 (NO at step S21TM4130), when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not turned on at step S21TM4140 (NO in step S21TM4140), the CPU 103 indicates that the setting value stored in the setting value storage area may be abnormal without executing the processing after step S21TM4510 related to the setting change mode. Setting value error To send over command to effect control for the CPU120.

  When receiving the setting value abnormality error command, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the image display device 5 that the setting value may be abnormal. For example, a message “Setting value may be abnormal” is displayed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to switch to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power supply is temporarily turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off). To notify the user to perform an operation for changing the set value (to confirm the set value). For example, a message “Please turn on the power after the power is turned off to shift to the setting change mode” is displayed. Note that similar notification may be performed by audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined loop process (repetition of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) until the power is cut off.

  In this loop processing, after the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4200), the character “E” is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, etc., “the set value is not a normal value (0 to 5). Although there is a possibility, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode (all being judged as YES in steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140) is not established and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. Notification is made (step S21TM4210). Then, a security signal is output from the output terminal (terminal number 10) to which one end of the security signal line is connected (step S21TM4220). The security signal is input to an external device to which the other end of the security signal line is connected (for example, a hall computer that manages information of a plurality of gaming machines, a card unit provided corresponding to the gaming machine, or a calling lamp device). Is done.

  During the loop processing, the letter “E” is displayed every 4 ms on the 7-segment display provided in the display monitor 21TM029. By providing a 4 ms weight, it is possible to prevent excessive heat from staying in the 7-segment display and damaging the display. In addition, the security signal is continuously output during the loop processing period. By outputting the security signal to the outside, a predetermined event (in this example, the set value is a normal value (0 to 5) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the input of the security signal in an external device such as a hall computer. It is possible to specify the possibility that the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied and the mode has not been changed to the setting change mode.

  The loop processing from step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 is continued until the power supply is stopped (until the power switch 21TM055 is turned off).

  That is, when the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), when the set value is not a normal value (NO in step S21TM4020), and when the power is cut off during the setting change ( That is, when the setting changing flag is set at the time of power-on, and when it is determined as YES in step S21TM4030), the game should not be performed in this state, Before shifting to normal game processing (for example, game control timer interrupt processing including prize ball processing, special symbol process processing, etc.), it is necessary to determine the set value in the set value storage area to a regular value. Therefore, the RAM clear flag is set to shift to the setting change mode.

  In the present embodiment, in order to make the setting value changeable (setting change mode), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, (3) Three conditions that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state are necessary. When the CPU 103 confirms that all of the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied by the determination processing in step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the setting value can be changed ( It is possible to shift to the setting change mode.

  If any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied, the change of the set value is not permitted, so that the set value in the set value storage area can be fixed to a normal value. Therefore, it is not possible to shift to normal game processing. Therefore, if it is determined NO in any of the determination processes of step S21TM4120, step S21TM4130, and step S21TM4140, the process proceeds to the loop process described above (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220).

  If the process shifts to the loop process (step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), it is not possible to shift to the normal game process. Don't be. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied, the power is turned off once, and all the conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied at the next power-on. Thus, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting value in the setting value storage area is fixed to a regular value.

  The CPU 103 determines the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B in advance when any of the conditions (1) to (3) is not satisfied. You may make it prompt to make a power supply OFF state by making it light-emit in a power-off instruction | indication mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), the setting value change is not permitted but the setting value can be checked (setting check mode). , (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4060), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state (YES in step S21TM4070).

  However, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), (1) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4120), and (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in an ON state. Even if the two conditions are satisfied (YES in step S21TM4130), the setting confirmation mode is not controlled. Even if these conditions (1) and (2) are satisfied, (3) if it is determined in step S21TM4140 that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not in the ON state (NO) The game is controlled to be in a game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) without being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

  Next, processing related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 and 9-8. In the process of FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 matches a normal value (any one of 0 to 5 in this example) ( Step S21TM4510). When a regular value (0 to 5) is stored in the set value storage area (YES in step S21TM4510), the process proceeds to step S21TM4530. When the regular value (0 to 5) is not stored in the set value storage area (NO in step S21TM4510), the CPU 103 sets “0” having the lowest jackpot probability as the regular value in the set value storage area. Is stored (step S21TM4520). Then, control goes to a step S21TM4530.

  Next, the CPU 103 waits for 4 ms (step S21TM4530), and then executes a power-off process (step S21TM4540). In the power-off process, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a power-off signal based on a power-off including an unexpected power outage is input, and if a power-off signal is input, Immediately before it becomes impossible to operate due to the stop, the power supply stop process is executed. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, but also the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. That is, in the power-off process, check data is stored in a predetermined backup area.

  Thereby, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled (when the repetition process of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4620 or the repetition process of step S21TM4530 to step S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 is performed) When the disconnection occurs, the data check is appropriately executed in step S21TM4010 after the power supply is restored.

  Next, the CPU 103 causes the display monitor 21TM029 to display a value corresponding to the set value (0 to 5 in this example) stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM4550). Here, the value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the value (0-5) stored in the set value storage area. The game shop clerk normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, so if the value stored in the set value storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as it is, the game shop clerk actually There is a risk of erroneously recognizing the set value. Therefore, in this example, [value stored in the set value storage area + 1] is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as the set value. Next, the CPU 103 outputs a security signal (step S21TM4560).

  Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4570). If the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4570), that is, if RAM clear is not executed after completion of the mode (here, the setting confirmation mode), the CPU 103 designates that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled. A setting confirmation mode command is transmitted (step S21TM4650), and the process proceeds to step S21TM4680. The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4570), that is, if the RAM clear is executed after the mode (in this case, the setting change mode), the CPU 103 changes the set value. A setting changing flag indicating that there is a possibility of being present is set (step S21TM4580). Since the area in which the value of the setting changing flag is stored is included in the backup RAM area, the value of the setting changing flag is retained even when the power is turned off. For this reason, if a power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the value of the setting changing flag is set to 1 (set state) at the next power-on.

  Next, CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating that control has been performed in the setting change mode (step S21TM4590). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode.

  Next, the CPU 103 inputs setting switch information indicating whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM4600), and confirms whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. (Step S21TM4610).

  If setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is not operated (NO in step S21TM4610), CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM4680. When the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM4610), the CPU 103 updates the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM4620), and proceeds to step S21TM4680. Transition. The updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the next step S21TM4550.

  Every time the game shop clerk operates the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM4610), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated (step S21TM4620). For example, the normal set value is in the range of 0 to 5, and the set value stored in the set value storage area when the control is changed to the setting change mode (when the power is turned on or when the previous power cut occurs) is 3. If there is a setting change, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is updated in the order of 3 → 4 → 5 → 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 and the display monitor 21TM029 is updated accordingly. The displayed information is updated in the order of 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4.

  Here, it is possible to execute display of the current setting value (step S21TM4550), output of the security signal (step S21TM4560), and transmission of the setting confirmation mode command (step S21TM4650), but transmission of the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590). ) And the update of the setting value (step S21TM4620) are equivalent to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting value can be confirmed or the setting value cannot be changed. During the period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the processes in steps S21TM4530 to S21TM4570 and step S21TM4650 are repeatedly executed.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070) and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (determined as NO in step S21TM4040 and the RAM clear flag) Is controlled to be 0).

  In addition, the current setting value display (step S21TM4550) and security signal output (step S21TM4560) can be executed, and the setting change mode command transmission (step S21TM4590) and the setting value update (step S21TM4620) can be executed. This state corresponds to a setting change mode in which the setting value can be confirmed and changed.

  In the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (determined as YES in step S21TM4070 or step S21TM4130), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140). The RAM clear flag is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150).

  The setting confirmation mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting confirmation mode control. Therefore, when the setting confirmation mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 sets the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting confirmation mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is cut off. When the setting changing flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting confirmation mode command may be transmitted only when the setting confirmation mode command transmission flag is not set. Similarly, the setting change mode command is a command that is transmitted only once during the setting change mode control. Therefore, when the setting change mode command is transmitted, the CPU 103 can set the setting change mode command transmission flag that can specify that the setting change mode command has been transmitted and does not require backup storage when the power is turned off. When the setting change flag is cleared (step S21TM4720), the setting change mode command transmission flag may be cleared. The setting change mode command may be transmitted only when the setting change mode command transmission flag is not set.

  In step S21TM4680, CPU 103 confirms whether lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state or not. If the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (NO in step S21TM4680), the process after step S21TM4540 is repeated after waiting for 4 ms again (step S21TM4530). That is, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the control in the setting confirmation mode is continued. If the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the control in the setting change mode is continued.

  If lock switch 21TM051 is OFF in step S21TM4680 (YES in step S21TM4680), CPU 103 ends the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode and sets 1000 ms as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM4710). When the predetermined time is set as the value of the security signal timer, the value of the security signal timer is changed from the predetermined time to 0 ms in the information output process (step S21TM1670 in FIG. 9-9) when the normal game process is subsequently performed. Until then, the security signal is continuously output. For example, when the game control timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and when the game signal reaches 0 ms, the output of the security signal is stopped. Therefore, at the time of step S21TM4710, the remaining output period of the security signal is set to 1000 ms regardless of whether the setting change mode is ended or the setting confirmation mode is ended.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (1), in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, output of a security signal is started (step S21TM4560), and the setting change mode and setting confirmation are started. In response to the end of any control in the mode, the value of the security signal timer is set so that the security signal is continuously output until at least 1 sec has elapsed since the end of any control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Set (step S21TM4710).

  Here, the process of starting the output of the security signal in step S21TM4560 determines whether it is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is executed as a common process. In addition, the process of setting the remaining output period of the security signal in step S21TM4710 is also performed regardless of whether it is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (which mode is controlled). It is executed as a common process. In this way, security signal output control is simplified by sharing the security signal output start control and output end control when controlled in the setting change mode and when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. , The control burden can be reduced.

  Also, security signal output is started in response to the start of control in either the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, and the security signal is output in response to the end of control in either the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode. By stopping, it is possible to appropriately notify an external device such as a hall computer that the gaming machine may be controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Here, in step S21TM4710 immediately after the control of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, a common value (1000 ms) is used for the security signal when the setting change mode is controlled and when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The timer is set. However, if both security signal output start control and output end control are shared between the case where the setting change mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled, any mode is set on the external device side. It will be difficult to know if it has been controlled.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (2), when the setting change mode is controlled, that is, when the RAM clear flag is set to 1, the security signal is once set in step S21TM4710. After 1000 ms is set as the timer value, 30000 ms is reset (overwritten) as the security signal timer value in step S21TM1465 after the RAM is cleared based on the determination of NO in step S21TM4770 described later. Yes. That is, the remaining output period of the security signal is once set to 1 sec, and then the remaining output period of the security signal is reset to 30 sec (overwritten).

  When the signal output control described above is performed, the final output stop timing of the security signal is the end of the setting confirmation mode when the setting confirmation mode is controlled as shown in FIG. 9-10 (2). 1 sec has elapsed, and when the setting change mode has been controlled, 30 sec has elapsed since the end of the setting change mode.

  Specifically, when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode (when the RAM is not cleared and the value of the security signal timer is not changed from 1 second), the game control timer interruption after the interruption is permitted. In the process (for example, the information output process of step S21TM1670 shown in FIG. 9-9), the security signal output is continued until the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1000 ms to 0 ms, and the setting change mode is controlled ( In the case where the RAM is cleared and the value of the security signal timer is changed from 1 second to 30 seconds), the game control timer interrupt processing after the interrupt permission (for example, in FIG. 9-9) In the indicated step S21TM1670 (information output processing), security is performed until the value of the security signal timer is changed from 30000 ms to 0 ms. It will be to continue the output of the issue. In addition, when it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode or when it is controlled to the setting change mode, the value of the security signal timer is set to a predetermined time (1000 ms or 30000 ms) at the timing before the transition to the game control timer interrupt processing. The security signal output may be continued until 0 ms until the game control timer interruption process is completed after the security signal output ends.

  As described above, the security signal is continuously output for at least 1 sec when the setting confirmation mode control is finished and when the setting change mode control is finished, and the setting change mode is controlled. In this case, the security signal is continuously output until 30 seconds elapse after the setting change mode control is completed. With such a configuration, the security signal output period can be made different between the case where the setting check mode is controlled and the case where the setting change mode is controlled while sharing the security signal output control.

  As a result, in the external device, it is also possible to grasp whether the initialization check process has been executed and the setting check mode has been controlled, or the initialization process has been executed and the control mode has been changed to the setting change mode. . For example, if the security signal output period is less than 30 seconds, it is possible to specify that the setting confirmation mode has been controlled without executing the initialization process, and if the security signal output period is 30 seconds or more, the initial state It is possible to estimate that there is a possibility that control processing has been executed and the setting change mode has been controlled.

  Note that a security signal is also output when a game stop target error such as a magnetic abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection sensor. The security signal in this case is continuously output until the gaming machine is turned off. Further, the CPU 103 sets an abnormality detection flag in the backup area (the area cleared by the initialization process) of the RAM 102 based on the abnormality detected by the abnormality detection sensor. A security signal is output for 4 minutes based on the fact that the abnormality detection flag is set when the power is restored.

  Here, when the setting check mode is controlled when the power is restored, the RAM clear is not executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-8 is not executed), so that the value of the abnormality detection flag is initially set in the signal output process. The security signal can be continuously output for 4 minutes after the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to limit the security signal output period to a period until one second elapses from the end of the control in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is restored, the RAM clear is executed (for example, step S21TM1410 shown in FIG. 9-8 is executed). The anomaly detection flag is cleared (it is unknown whether an anomaly was detected at the time of power failure), and as a result, the security signal output period ends the setting change mode Is a period until 30 seconds elapse (period corresponding to execution of RAM clear).

  In the example shown in step S21TM4710 of FIG. 9-7, 1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer. The value of the security signal timer to be set to suffices to be at least a period in which the external device can recognize that the security signal has been output, and may be, for example, 50 ms or more. That is, the common 50 ms may be set as the value of the security signal timer when the setting change mode ends and when the setting confirmation mode ends.

  After the process of step S21TM4710, the CPU 103 clears the setting changing flag (step S21TM4720). Here, if the power change occurs after the setting changing flag is cleared, it is determined that the setting changing flag is not set when power is restored (NO in step S21TM4030). Become.

  Next, the CPU 103 deletes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM4730). Then, the setting value (any one of 0 to 5) stored in the setting value storage area is set in the setting command, and the setting command is transmitted (step S21TM4760). Even if the mode is not controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the process of step S21TM4760 is executed, and the setting command is transmitted.

  Here, the player normally recognizes the range of the set value as 1 to 6, and the value specified by the set command (value stored in the set value storage area) is directly displayed on the effect control CPU 120 side as an image. If displayed on the display device 5, the player may erroneously understand the set value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 recognizes a value obtained by adding 1 to the value (0 to 5) specified by the setting command as the setting value (1 to 6), An effect that suggests a set value is executed in a range.

  Not only in such a form, the CPU 103 sets a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0-5) stored in the setting value storage area in the setting command, and effects control It may be transmitted to the CPU 120 for use. Thereby, the range of the setting value designated by the setting command is 1 to 6, which matches the range normally recognized by the player. On the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting values (1 to 6) designated by the setting command are displayed on the image display device 5 as they are, or an effect suggesting the setting values (1 to 6) designated by the setting command is executed. By doing so, the set value can be notified or suggested appropriately. Further, it is not necessary to perform addition processing on the setting value specified by the received setting command on the effect control CPU 120 side, and the control burden on the effect control CPU 120 side can be reduced.

  As described above, the production control CPU 120 can specify that the setting confirmation mode or the setting change mode has ended by receiving the setting command. In addition, it is possible to suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value.

  Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (step S21TM4770).

  If the value of the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES in step S21TM4770), the data check result in the backup RAM area is normal (YES in step S21TM4010), and the set value is a normal value (step In step S21TM4020, it is determined that the power is not cut off during the setting change (NO in step S21TM4030), and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM4040). Therefore, it is only necessary to execute processing at the time of power-off recovery without clearing the RAM.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 0, the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1340 shown in FIG. 9-8. Specifically, the processing of step S21TM1340 to step S21TM1370 and step S21TM1480 to step S21TM1540, that is, the processing when the data check result of the backup RAM area is normal at power-on is executed, and after interrupt permission, FIG. The game control timer interrupt process (including special symbol process process etc.) shown in FIG. That is, when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is controlled, or when the control of the setting confirmation mode is finished, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is 0 based on the value of the RAM clear flag. Without executing the clear, a backup command is transmitted as a command at the time of power-off recovery (step S21TM1370), and the process proceeds to the normal game process.

  Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 has recovered from the power-off based on the data at the time of power supply stop (RAM clear is not performed) )). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from the power interruption is performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. (RAM clear is not performed) can be notified.

  On the other hand, if the value of the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO in step S21TM4770), RAM clear is set to 1 in step S21TM4050 or step S21TM4150, and it is determined to execute the RAM clear. Therefore, it is only necessary to execute processing at the time of power-on accompanied by RAM clear.

  When the value of the RAM clear flag is 1, the CPU 103 executes processing subsequent to step S21TM1410 (RAM clear processing) shown in FIG. 9-8. Specifically, steps S21TM1410 (RAM clear processing) to step S21TM1460, processing for setting 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465), and processing from step S21TM1480 to step S21TM1540, that is, backup RAM area The processing when the data check result is abnormal may be executed, and after the interruption is permitted, the game control timer interruption processing (including special symbol process processing etc.) shown in FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process based on the fact that the RAM clear flag is 1 (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clear process, the data indicating the game state before the power supply stop stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, hold memory, etc.) is cleared to the initial value. However, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed from before the RAM clearing process. In addition, for each set value, an area in which each aggregate value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a role ratio, and a base is stored is not cleared. The value is not changed from before the RAM clear process. Then, by displaying the character “C” on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 102 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of a counter value for generating a random number for determination per normal symbol) may be left as it is.

  The reason for not clearing the setting value stored in the setting value storage area in this RAM clearing process is as follows. (A) If the setting change mode is not controlled, a normal value is stored in the setting value storage area when the power is turned on. (B) When controlled to the setting change mode, the value in the setting value storage area has been set to 0 (step S21TM4520) or in the setting change mode. This is because the regular value is stored by the operation (step S21TM4610 and step S21TM4620). Further, after the RAM clear process, it is impossible to control the setting change mode, and there is no opportunity to change the value stored in the set value storage area.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and sequentially sets the contents of the initialization setting table in the work area (step S21TM1440). By the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, a random symbol counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and the like are flags that are selectively processed according to the control state. The initial value is set.

  After executing step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of RAM 102 (step S21TM1450). In a game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that initialization processing has been performed when the power is turned on (or at the end of the setting change mode) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 performs the initialization process based on the reception of the initialization command (the RAM is cleared without being recovered from the power interruption based on the data when the power supply is stopped). Recognize When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9, the game state has been initialized (when power supply is stopped). Based on the data, it is possible to notify that the RAM has been cleared without being recovered from the power interruption.

  Next, the CPU 103 sets 30 seconds as the value of the security signal timer (step S21TM1465). Thereby, the value (1 second) of the security signal timer set in step S21TM4710 after the end of the setting change mode is changed (overwritten) to a value (30 seconds) corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. become. Further, when the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, step S21TM4710 is not executed (1 second is set as the value of the security signal timer). The security signal timer value is set to 30 seconds corresponding to the RAM clear being executed. On the other hand, when the RAM clear is not executed (including the case where the setting check mode is controlled), the process of step S21TM1465 is not executed, so the value of the security signal timer is equal to the one second set in step S21TM4710. It remains.

  When the value of the security signal timer is set in step S21TM1465 or step S21TM4710 described above, a security signal is output in the game control timer interrupt process after the interrupt is permitted (FIG. 9-9). After that, every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed with the permission of interrupt, the value of the security signal timer is subtracted by 2 ms, and the value of the security signal timer becomes 0. The security signal output is stopped at the timing. Then, when the process of step S21TM1465 ends, the process proceeds to step S21TM1480.

  Further, in the case of YES at step S21TM4770 shown in FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 performs a game state restoration process (the process of step S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning the game control microcomputer 100 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. . Specifically, the start address of the backup time setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), and the contents of the backup time setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, reserved memory, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output An area where the output state of the port is stored (output port buffer), a portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. A setting value storage area (an area in which a fixed setting value is stored) is also included in a portion that should not be initialized. In addition, for each set value, an area in which total values (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as a linkage ratio, a winning ratio, and a base are stored is also included in a portion that should not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (step S21TM1360). In a game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the big hit determination in the special symbol process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of recovery) as a command at the time of power supply recovery (step S21TM1370). Based on the reception of this backup command (command at the time of recovery), the effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the recovery from the power-off has been performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, for example, in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and the game effect lamp 9, recovery from the power interruption is performed based on the data when the power supply is stopped. Can be notified. Next, the CPU 103 proceeds to step S21TM1480.

  Then, CPU 103 executes setting processing of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037. In addition, communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to an executable state.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). For example, the CPU 103 performs processing according to a random number circuit setting program to perform setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result.

  In step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes display random number update processing (step S21TM1520) and initial value random number update processing (step S21TM1530). When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S21TM1510). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt permitted state is set. Set (step S21TM1540). As a result, the game control timer interruption process (FIG. 9-9) shifts to a normal game process that can be executed. In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit. The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this example, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the CPU 103 determines whether or not both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is switched to the power-off recovery process (the process after step S21TM1340), but not limited to such a form. If it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 0 (YES), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both closed (the gaming machine frame 3 or glass Depending on the state of the door frame 3a, the process may be shifted to the process at the time of power-off restoration (the process after step S21TM1340).

  In this example, if the CPU 103 determines in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the CPU 103 determines whether both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are closed. Without confirming (regardless of the state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a), the process is shifted to the process at power-on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)). Not limited to, if it is determined in step S21TM4770 that the RAM clear flag is 1 (NO), the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are both in the closed state (the gaming machine frame 3 or depending on the state of the glass door frame 3a), the process may be shifted to the process when the power is turned on (the process after step S21TM1410 (RAM clear)).

  As described above, a game clerk or the like turns the pachinko gaming machine 1 into the setting change mode by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning on the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. In addition to being able to control, it is possible to initialize the gaming state and the like (to execute RAM clear). Further, by turning on the lock switch 21TM051 and turning off the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and the game state and the like. Can not be initialized (NO in step S21TM4040 or step S21TM4140 and the RAM clear flag is not set to 1). In this way, the game shop clerk can select whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is to be controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and can also select whether or not to initialize the gaming state and the like. Yes.

  As described above, when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, the setting value is unstable because it was controlled to the setting change mode when the power was cut off. There is a possibility that the setting value to be determined on the game hall side is not stored in the setting value storage area. In the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 does not shift to the normal game process based on the setting change flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030) (step S21TM4030). S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220 (loop processing) can be controlled, and a security signal is output corresponding to the control to the game stop state (step S21TM4220).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a game from being started in a state where the set value is unstable (game control timer interrupt processing is executed), and when the power is turned on, It is possible to notify the external device that the setting change mode was controlled when disconnection occurred.

  Also, in the example shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8, the CPU 103 sets the condition (in step S21TM4030: YES) for shifting to the setting change mode based on the setting changing flag being set (YES in step S21TM4030). When all of steps S21TM4120 to S21TM4140 are YES, a set value abnormality error command is transmitted (step S21TM4190) and the display monitor in the game stop state (loop processing of steps S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) An error display for displaying the letter “E” on 21TM029 is performed (step S21TM4210).

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 9-9. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9-9 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615). On the condition that no game stop error has occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to switch The state of detection signals input from the various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch process in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormal state is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The level of magnetism to be determined is detected, the level of vibration determined to be abnormal is detected by a vibration sensor (not shown), the level and frequency band determined to be abnormal by a radio wave sensor (not shown) Based on the detection of the radio wave, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. When the detection signal is input from the second start port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is Prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) for setting and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays a winning information process (step S21TM1640) for calculating winning information such as a winning ratio, a running ratio, and a base, and a display monitor for winning information such as a winning ratio, a running ratio, and a base calculated in the winning information processing. A winning information display control process (step S21TM1650) displayed on the 21TM029 is performed. Thereafter, by executing predetermined main-side error processing (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the explanation of step S1615. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set and the next timer interrupt step. In S21TM1615, the game may be stopped (switch processing is not executed). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, payout information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of game random numbers such as the random number MR1 and the random numbers MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process process, thereby displaying the normal symbol variation display and the movable wing in the variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Enables the tilting operation setting of the piece.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, the output port included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. Then, by turning it off, etc., it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for sending a command for notifying a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or a command for notifying that a fluctuation pattern or a fluctuation display has ended. By transmitting the existing command such as information including the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12. Further, the production control board 12 (production control CPU 120) receives these commands from the main board 11, and executes productions that suggest the set values at various timings, such as during variable display or during big hit games. May be.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-6, 9-7, and 9-8, the RAM clear (step S21TM1410) is always executed when the setting change mode is controlled. This is because, as shown in FIG. 9-4, the range of random numbers determined to be a big hit differs according to the set value. For example, although the jackpot determination random number extracted at the start winning before the setting change is determined to be a big hit in relation to the setting value before the change, an event that is determined to be out of relation in relation to the setting value after the change On the contrary, although it is determined that the relationship with the setting value before the change is out of place, an event that is determined as a big hit may occur with the relationship with the setting value after the change. In such a case, the game after the setting change is continued based on the jackpot determining random number extracted at the time of starting winning before the setting change (the game control timer interrupt process including the special symbol process process is executed). It is inappropriate to clear the reserved memory (special symbol reserved memory, normal symbol reserved memory) by initializing the gaming state, and set the number of reserved memories to the initial value (0). Yes.

  In addition, during the period controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, as a result of the interruption permission in step S21TM1540 not being performed, the switching process (step S21TM1620) in the game control timer interruption process is not performed, Passing through the gate is invalid. This is because the random number circuit setting process (step S21TM1490) or the like is not yet executed during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled, and the random number is not updated. If a random number is extracted based on the start prize during the period controlled in the setting change mode, the same random number value is obtained regardless of the timing of the start prize, and the game is played based on such a random number value. Since it is inappropriate to proceed, start winnings and passing gates are invalidated.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 9-11, by displaying the letter “E” on each of the seven-segment display devices 21TM029A to 21TM029D constituting the display monitor 21TM029, an abnormality occurs in the game store clerk (in the setting change mode). (There is a possibility that the power supply may have been cut off in the controlled state). The presentation control CPU 120 that has received the set value abnormality error command displays a message “Please turn on the power again and shift to the setting change mode after power is turned off” on the image display device 5, thereby To change the set value by switching to the setting change mode when the power is turned on again (when the power switch 21TM055 is turned on) after the power is turned off (the power switch 21TM055 is turned off). Notification to urge the user to perform (set the set value) is performed.

  In this example, (a) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, that is, (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is It is in the open state (YES in step S21TM4120), (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (step S21TM4140). If YES, the setting change mode is controlled. As a result, the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is not executed, and the message display on the effect control board 12 side (“turn the power on again after power off”) Please change to the setting change mode ").

  Here, in the effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting change mode command (step S21TM4590), the image display device 5 has been controlled to the setting change mode, that is, the setting change operation (operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052). ) Can be notified that the set value can be changed. For example, a message “Setting change mode is in progress” and a message “Please change the setting value by performing setting change operation” can be displayed on the image display device 5. Thereby, the clerk of the game hall can grasp that the setting change mode is controlled, and the set value stored in the set value storage area by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed to the scheduled setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is switched to the OFF state, so that the setting value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game processing.

  On the other hand, (b) when the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on, and the transition condition for controlling to the setting change mode is not satisfied, that is, among the above (i) to (iii) If any of the above conditions is not satisfied, the control is not performed in the setting change mode, but is controlled to the game stop state (loop processing in steps S21TM4200 to S21TM4220) after the setting value abnormality error command transmission (step S21TM4190). . As a result, error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and message display on the effect control board 12 side (“power is turned on again after power is turned off”). To change to the setting change mode ").

  In this way, error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) is executed, and message display on the effect control board 12 side (“turn on power again after power off”) ”) Is also performed, the game machine status is set to the setting change mode after the power is restored even if the power is cut off during the setting change mode. It will be notified that the state is not established. In this case, the game shop clerk, etc. are not controlled in the setting change mode, and know that the game is stopped (the power must be turned on again to control the setting change mode). Is possible. Accordingly, after turning off the power supply once, the power is turned on again by operating so that all the conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are satisfied. Then, in the setting change mode, by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed to the scheduled setting value, and then the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off. By switching to the state, the set value can be confirmed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shifted to the normal game process.

  Thus, when a power interruption occurs in the setting change mode, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately notified when the power is restored.

  Here, if the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is satisfied when the power is restored (a), an error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: “E” display on the display monitor 21TM029) is performed. Thus, the mode is automatically shifted to the setting change mode, and an unnecessary error display can be avoided to promptly change the set value.

  On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the setting change mode is not satisfied when the power is restored (b), the power cannot be changed to the setting changing mode when the power is restored even though the power is cut off during the setting changing mode. Since it is in the state, it is forcibly controlled to the game stop state (loop processing of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220), and the error display on the main board 11 side (step S21TM4210: display of “E” on the display monitor 21TM029) Will be done. Thereby, it is possible to limit the progress of the game in an unstable state where the set value is not fixed, and it is possible to realize appropriate game control.

  When the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the transition conditions (i) to (iii) for shifting to the setting change mode are all satisfied, and the transition condition (i ) To (iii) may not be established, and a different command may be transmitted as a command indicating that the set value may be abnormal.

  For example, if the transition condition is satisfied, it is a command indicating that the setting value may be abnormal and has been shifted to the setting change mode (or the condition for shifting is satisfied). When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the command, the message “Setting value may be abnormal” and the message “Automatically controlled in the setting change mode” are displayed as images. It may be displayed on the device 5. On the other hand, if the transition condition is not satisfied, the set value abnormality error command in step S21TM4190 may be transmitted as described above.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game processing, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is operated when both the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a are in the closed state. In response to the change (from the OFF state to the ON state), a lock switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120, and (2) a setting switch (clear switch) ) In response to the operation of 21TM052 (from the OFF state to the ON state), the setting control switch operation command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 to the effect control CPU 120.

  The game control microcomputer 100 is not limited to such a form, and the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished and the process proceeds to the normal game process. The lock switch operation command and the setting switch operation command may not be transmitted without confirming whether or not the setting switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated. As described above, during the period in which the normal game process (game control timer interrupt process) is being executed, the execution status of the operation for changing the set value and the operation for checking the set value is not checked. As a result, the control burden on the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced.

(Modification of power-on processing)
In the example shown in FIG. 9-6, if the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state (YES in step S21TM4120). ), (Ii) The lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4130), and (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state (YES in step S21TM4140). Only when it is confirmed that the RAM has been cleared, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150), and the mode is changed to the setting change mode (NO in step S21TM4570).

  Not only in such a form, but as shown in FIG. 9-12, when the setting change flag is set at power-on (YES in step S21TM4030), the three conditions (i) to (iii) are The RAM clear flag may be set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without confirming whether it is established or not (step S21TM4570, NO).

  In the process shown in FIG. 9-12, if the data check result in the backup RAM area is abnormal (NO in step S21TM4010), if the set value is not a regular value (NO in step S21TM4020), the setting changing flag is set. If it is determined (YES in step S21TM4030), the RAM clear flag is set to 1 (step S21TM4150) without determining whether or not the conditions (i) to (iii) are satisfied (step S21TM4150). The part controlled by the mode (NO in step S21TM4570) and not controlled by the game stop state (process corresponding to the loop process of step S21TM4200 to step S21TM4220) is different from the process shown in FIG. 9-6. The other parts are the same as the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8.

  Even in this case, the RAM clear flag is set to 1 and the mode is changed to the setting change mode based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is turned on. It is possible to appropriately determine the state of the gaming machine when the power interruption occurs during the change.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-12, if the setting change flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030), (i) the gaming machine frame 3 is in an open state, and (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on. And (iii) the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, and is controlled to the setting change mode (determined NO in step S21TM4570). If the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting values in the setting value storage area can be changed) (i) to (iii). Regardless of whether the three conditions are satisfied, the setting change mode is forcibly controlled.

  As described above, when the power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode, the three conditions (i) to (iii) are set based on the fact that the setting changing flag is set when the power is restored. Regardless of whether or not is established, the setting change mode is automatically controlled, so that the workability for determining the set value can be improved.

  If the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the setting is performed even if the condition that (ii) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (YES in step S21TM4130) is not satisfied. It will be controlled to change mode. As a result, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 while the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. (Step S21TM4610 to Step S21TM4620 in FIG. 9-7).

  As described above, the condition for terminating the setting change mode is that the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES in step S21TM4680). Therefore, if the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state, the store clerk who has performed the setting value changing operation once confirms the set value and ends the setting change mode. After switching to the ON state, the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (YES is determined in step S21TM4680).

  As described above, when the setting changing flag is not set (NO in step S21TM4030) and when the setting changing flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the condition for starting the control of the setting change mode is set. The conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode (operation for switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state) are made common to clarify the conditions for ending the control of the setting change mode, Appropriately shift to normal game processing.

  Here, when the setting change mode is controlled based on the fact that the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), a notification for urging the lock switch 21TM051 to be turned on may be issued. good. For example, when the setting change flag is set (YES in step S21TM4030), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag to 1 in step S21TM4150 and transmits a set value abnormality error command (to the above-described step S21TM4190). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the set value error error command (step S21TM4110) says, “Turn on the lock switch once and switch it off after changing the set value”. The message may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  In the processes shown in FIGS. 9-6 to 9-8 and FIGS. 9-12, it is impossible to shift to the normal game process when the setting change flag is set. Therefore, when the gaming machine manufacturer ships the pachinko gaming machine 1 (before installation in the game hall), the setting change flag is set in advance, and then the game hall side goes through the setting change mode. Unless the setting value is changed and the setting change mode is terminated, it is impossible to play a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the game hall, it is possible to make sure that the setting value is changed to the setting change mode and the setting change operation is performed and the setting value is confirmed.

(Set value storage control when power failure occurs while changing set values)
Next, setting value storage control in the case where a power failure occurs during setting value change will be described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIG. 9-7, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is changed by operating the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 in the setting change mode.

  First, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off before the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (before the end of the setting change mode) by changing the setting value during the setting change mode, FIG. Explanation will be made using -13 (1).

  As shown in order 1, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to be controlled in the setting change mode. In this example, when the power is turned on, “0” is stored as a set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. Next, as shown in order 2, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “0” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and the read setting value is set to 1. “1” is added to the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 3, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “0” based on the first operation of the setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “1” to “1”, and “2” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state. Furthermore, as shown in order 4, in the setting change mode, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is “1” based on the operation of the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052. Is changed from “2” to “2”, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the changed set value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state, that is, before the operation for ending the setting change mode is performed, the power is cut off. At this time, the setting value storage area is in a state where the setting value “2” after the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated is stored. In the power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 6, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is set to the ON state (the clear switch 21TM052 is also set to the ON state) to be controlled in the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as a setting value. This set value “2” is a value stored in the set value storage area at the time of the occurrence of power interruption during the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in the order 7, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out, and the read setting value is set to 1. "3" is added to the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  Since the setting change flag is set when the power is turned on in order 6, when the control shown in FIGS. 9-12 is applied, the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state (or cleared). Even if the switch 21TM052 is in the OFF state), the setting change mode is automatically controlled. Therefore, the state of the lock switch 21TM051 in the order 6 and the order 7 may be an OFF state.

  In this way, when the set value is changed in the setting change mode and the power switch is cut off without the lock switch 21TM051 being turned off (without ending the setting change mode), the power is restored. The setting value after the change in the previous setting change mode is held in the setting value storage area. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, there may be a setting value that has already been scheduled. Thus, the workability can be improved because the gaming machine may be shifted to the normal game processing.

  Next, regarding the control in the case where the power is cut off after the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state (after the setting change mode is finished) during the setting change mode, the setting value is changed. This will be described with reference to FIG. 9-13 (2).

  Orders 1 to 4 are the same as the example shown in FIG. Next, as shown in order 5, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting change mode ends. Accordingly, the setting value “2” after the second setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 is operated is determined as the final setting value. At this time, “2” is stored as a setting value in the setting value storage area, and “3” obtained by adding 1 to the determined setting value is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029.

  Thereafter, as shown in order 6, it is assumed that an operation for turning off the power switch 21TM055 is performed, and the power supply is stopped. In this power-off state, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area formed in the backup area of the RAM 102 is held as it is.

  Next, as shown in order 7, when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on (the clear switch 21TM052 is also turned on) and controlled to the setting change mode. When the power is turned on, “2” is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 as a setting value. This set value “2” is a value that is finally stored in the set value storage area at the end of the previous setting change mode.

  Next, as shown in order 8, when the setting change mode is started, the setting value “2” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read, and the read setting value is set to 1. "3" is added to the display monitor 21TM029. At this time, the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-13 (1) and (2), when the power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode, and when the power supply is stopped after the control in the setting change mode is completed. In any case, when the power supply is restored, the setting value after being changed according to the setting change operation in the previous setting change mode, that is, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area immediately before the power is turned off is The set value is valid (the set value stored in the setting storage area when the power is restored).

  The setting value storage control is not limited to the setting value storage control illustrated in FIG. 9-13. That is, when the setting change mode is controlled, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area is copied to the setting information temporary storage area, and the setting change switch (clear switch) is controlled when the setting change mode is controlled. When 21TM052 is operated, the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is changed without changing the setting value in the setting value storage area, and the setting change mode is terminated (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on). The setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is stored in the setting value storage area (overwritten) to confirm the setting value based on the operation of switching from the state to the OFF state). May be. In this case, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is a value (1-6) obtained by adding 1 to the setting value (0-5) stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 also changes in accordance with the change of the setting value stored in.

  With such a configuration, even when the setting change mode is controlled by turning on the power and a setting changing operation is performed (when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is changed), the setting is changed. When the operation for ending the change mode is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state) and the power is cut off, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is It has not been changed since the time of input (before the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode). That is, in the power supply stop state, the set value stored in the set value storage area when the power is turned on last time is continuously held. Therefore, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is restored is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the previous power-on. It becomes a value according to the set value.

  In this way, it is possible to appropriately determine a set value when a power interruption occurs while being controlled in the setting change mode. In addition, when the power supply is stopped in an unstable state where the setting change mode has not ended, the change of the set value can be limited.

  The control related to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode shown in the above embodiment is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5), and for game machines having different jackpot probabilities according to the setting values. Although it is applicable, the present invention is not limited to this, and although a plurality of setting values (for example, 0 to 5) are provided, the jackpot probability is common regardless of the setting value (for example, all of the setting values 0 to 5) It can also be applied to a gaming machine whose jackpot probability is 1/300.

  FIG. 9-14 shows the setting change mode by the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification of transition to the setting confirmation mode is performed. 9-14 (1) shows an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled in the setting change mode, and FIG. 9-14 (2) shows an image displayed when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Examples of images displayed on the device 5 are respectively shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-14 (1), when the power is turned on (particularly before the wait for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the start of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (1) (B), based on the fact that the setting change mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 is received in step S 21 TM 1140 in the main process, The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode and can notify the fact. For example, the character “change setting” is displayed on the image display device 5, and a voice (for example, a voice “setting is being changed”) is output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R to notify the transition to the setting change mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white flashing mode), thereby notifying that the setting change mode has been entered. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like, it is possible to notify that the mode is changed to the setting change mode. It becomes possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 9-14 (1) (B), other display information on the image display device 5 (for example, effect symbol, small symbol, fourth symbol, right-handed display, etc.) is not displayed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 cannot be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the sound notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode (for example, a sound “setting is being changed”) and the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode) By making it emit light, it is notified that it has shifted to the setting change mode. Thereafter, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters “setting change” are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 9-14 (1), the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM4760 in the main process. It is possible to identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has finished the setting change mode and notify the fact. For example, in the image display device 5, a “setting change complete” character is displayed, and a voice (for example, a voice “setting is being changed”) for notifying the transition to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output is stopped, and the game effect lamp 9 stops the light emission in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), thereby notifying that the setting change mode has ended. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has ended.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-14 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and has entered a game-ready state (the gaming control timer interruption processing is completed). The effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen is transmitted in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 that receives the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 9-14 (2), when the power is turned on (particularly before the waiting for the effect control board operation waiting in step S21TM1040 is completed), the start of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 9-14 (2), based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM4650 in the main process, The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify the fact. For example, the characters “confirming setting” are displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound (for example, a sound “confirming setting”) is output from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R to notify the transition to the setting confirmation mode. The effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white flashing mode), thereby notifying that the mode has been switched to the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the mode has been switched to the setting confirmation mode. It becomes possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in FIG. 9-14 (2) (B), other display information (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) in the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  When the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). When the image display device 5 cannot be controlled) until the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). The notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the sound notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting confirmation mode (for example, a sound “setting is being changed”), and the game effect lamp 9 is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode). By making it emit light, it notifies that it changed to setting check mode. Thereafter, when the video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the audio notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the characters “confirming setting” are displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (2) (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 in step S21TM4760 in the main process. It is possible to identify that the game control microcomputer 100 has finished the setting confirmation mode and notify the fact. For example, in the image display device 5, a “setting confirmation end” character is displayed, and a voice (for example, “setting confirmation is in progress”) for notifying the transition to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The output is stopped, and the game effect lamp 9 stops the light emission in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), thereby notifying that the setting confirmation mode has ended. According to such a configuration, since it is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting confirmation mode is It is possible to clearly understand that the process has ended.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 9-14 (2), the CPU 103 has executed the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and has entered a game-ready state (the gaming control timer interrupt processing has been completed). The effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen is transmitted in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 receiving the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  Receiving the setting command, the effect control CPU 120 can suggest the setting value by executing the effect according to the setting value designated by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest a setting value to the player by changing the aspect of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state is ended according to the specified setting value. FIGS. 9-15 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. 9-15 (1) shows an example in which a “sunny” end image is selected on the jackpot end screen, and FIG. 9-15 (2) shows that a “cloudy” end screen is selected on the jackpot end screen. For example, FIG. 9-15 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 9-15 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value designated by the setting command.

  In step S21TM4760 of the main process, CPU 103 transmits a setting command for specifying a setting value to CPU 120 for effect control. In addition, when the big hit gaming state is ended, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for executing an ending effect in the image display device 5 to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can determine the ending effect mode based on the stored setting value by storing the setting value designated by the received setting command in the RAM 102. For example, based on the effect control command transmitted when the big hit gaming state is ended, the image display device 5 is stored together with a character for notifying that the big hit gaming state has ended (a character “BONUS end”). It is possible to display an ending image in a mode (a clear mode, a cloudy mode, a rain mode) determined based on the set value.

  The table shown in FIG. 9-15 (4) shows the case where the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3,4”, and “5, 6”. When the setting suggesting effect is determined to be the “clear” mode shown in FIG. 9-15 (1), the “cloudy” mode shown in FIG. 9-15 (2) is determined, and FIG. When the “rain” mode shown in 15 (3) is determined, the determination value is assigned.

  When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the “sunny” mode setting indication shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute an effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” aspect shown in (2) at a moderate rate (for example, 40%), and medium It is determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 40%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 has the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” aspect shown in (2) at a high rate (for example, 50%), and medium It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 30%). In addition, when the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, the effect control CPU 120 has a “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). Decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect), decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) in the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a low rate (for example, 20%), and medium It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at a ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by changing the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in how the setting suggestion effect is executed. The interest of the production can be improved. In this example, the player will be interested in how the ending effect that is executed when the jackpot gaming state ends, and in particular, the ending effect is executed in a “sunny” manner. Expect to be.

(Other Modifications Related to Feature 21TM)
In the above embodiment, an example in which the switch for changing the setting value is the same as the clear switch for initializing (RAM clearing) the gaming machine is shown. Is a switch different from the clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear), which is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect the operation). It may be. With such a configuration, the position of the switch for switching the setting value and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) is compared with the case where the switch for switching the setting value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when the set value is changed, confirmation of the set value and switching operation corresponding to the confirmation of the set value are facilitated, and workability can be improved.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the set value is displayed in a partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which game information such as the aggregated base is displayed. The display device is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 that displays the total gaming state, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, which is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the totaled game information and the set value can be grasped more clearly individually, so that the operation of changing the set value according to the totaled game information is easy. Thus, workability can be improved.

  In addition, a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) may be provided, but a switch for changing the set value may not be provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the set values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in order when the setting change mode is controlled (for example, 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 every 5 seconds), and the lock switch 21TM051 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state. Set values (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) are stored in the set value storage area (the set values stored in the set value storage area are stored in the setting information temporary storage area). The setting value may be determined by overwriting with the setting value that has been set). The store clerk at the amusement hall switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be confirmed is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value can be determined as the set value of the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine that encloses a game medium in a gaming machine and gives a score based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed game machine, information on the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037. For example, being controlled in the setting change mode, being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, being in the period controlled in the setting change mode, being in the period controlled in the setting confirmation mode, setting value It may include information indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has been completed, that the setting confirmation mode has been completed, and the like. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit such information to a management device such as a hall computer, and the hall computer may be able to specify that each gaming machine is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above embodiment, it is within the period controlled by the setting change mode by the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12, is within the period controlled by the setting confirmation mode, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode, based on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4A. The symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display 20 or the like may notify that it is controlled in the setting change mode (for example, the 7-segment display is caused to emit light in the first notification mode). Is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20 and the like. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a display for displaying the number of rounds in the big hit game (round number display), and instructs the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the game area on the right side). When a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, the display indicates that the setting change mode processing is being executed and the setting confirmation mode processing is being executed. You may make it light-emit in a mode.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned ON when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, and the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, Although the example in which the security signal is continuously turned on for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned off has been shown. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and then RAM clear is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is finished, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Accordingly, the security signal is temporarily turned OFF for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal is changed. Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. By adopting such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period during which the external device such as a hall computer is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and it is clear that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the expectation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 8-5, each effect mode (black star) depends on the set value of the gaming machine (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the big hit expectation. The selection ratio may be changed. For example, even when the big hit expectation is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, The expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate than in the case of 1 or 2. By adopting such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high due to the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more. Can be expected from the player, and the player can be made to pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation suggestion effect is executed. In addition, even in the case of a reach where the degree of big hit expectation is low, a player can perform the expectation suggestion effect with a large number of black stars (for example, 3 or more), thereby allowing the player to play the pachinko machine 1 Since it can be expected that the set value is high, the interest can be improved even when the big hit expectation is low.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine. However, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player. When a symbol is stopped in response to a stop button operation by a player, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, a slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big game The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of a bonus, a regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus). In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs depending on the setting value, and the setting value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode, and the setting value can be changed by controlling the setting check mode. It can be confirmed.

[Details and other forms regarding the feature 21TM]
Next, details regarding the above-described feature 21TM and other forms will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes a gaming machine frame. The gaming machine frame includes a gaming machine frame 3, a glass door frame 3a, and an outer frame (not shown). In addition, the gaming machine frame includes a hinge mechanism portion (not shown) on one end side in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when viewed from the player). The other end side in the left-right direction (for example, the right side when viewed from the player) is connected so as to be rotatable in a direction away from the outer frame. By rotating the glass door frame 3a like a door with the hinge mechanism portion as a fulcrum, the inner part of the outer frame including the game area of the game board 2 can be opened. On the other end side of the gaming machine frame 3 and the glass door frame 3a (for example, the right side when viewed from the player), there is provided a lock mechanism that fixes the other end side to the outer frame.

  Further, the outer frame is made of metal and is a frame body that becomes an outer portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is a synthetic resin frame body to which the gaming board 2 is attached, and has a substantially rectangular frame shape with the center penetrating when viewed from the front. The gaming board 2 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 from the front. The game board 2 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 is locked by a fixing device so as not to be detached from the gaming machine frame 3. The gaming machine frame 3 is a frame in which speakers 8L and 8R, a gaming effect lamp 9, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, and the like are arranged. The glass door frame 3a includes a glass plate (corresponding to a window portion) as a transparent window that protects the game board surface and allows the game area on the front surface of the game board 2 to be visually recognized.

  When a game shop clerk performs maintenance on the game board surface (for example, measures to eliminate clogged balls), the glass door frame 3a is hinged from the closed state in which the other end is fixed (locked) to the outer frame. By rotating the mechanism part (one end side) to the near side like a door with the fulcrum as a fulcrum, it is necessary to open the other end side away from the outer frame. In order for the store clerk to operate the power switch 21TM055, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the display changeover switch 21TM030, and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 2, and also for viewing the display monitor 21TM029. By rotating the gaming machine frame 3 from the closed state in which the other end side is fixed (locked) to the outer frame, the hinge mechanism portion (one end side) is pivoted to the front side like a door, It is necessary to make the other end side open from the outer frame.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 can detect to the payout microcomputer 21TM370 that the gaming machine frame 3 is open. When the open state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, a detection signal that can specify that the glass door frame 3a is in the open state is output to the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370. On the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the opened state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the opened state of the glass door frame 3a can be distinguished and recognized.

[Explanation regarding the feature 30TM]
Next, the characteristic part 30TM will be described. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the hold display and the active display. On the screen of the image display device 5, a first hold display area 30TM101 for displaying a first hold storage number (first hold display 30TM001 of 0 to 4) and a second hold storage number (second hold of 0 to 4). The second hold display area 30TM102 for displaying the display 30TM002) and the active display area 30TM103 for displaying the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the currently executed variable display are provided. The first hold display area 30TM101, the second hold display area 30TM102, and the active display area 30TM103 are provided at the lower part of the screen. The right side is the second hold display area 30TM102.

  When the first reserved memory number is not zero, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first reserved display 30TM001 in the number corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the first reserved display area 30TM101. That is, the first hold display 30TM001 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, although the start condition (for example, the winning to the first start winning opening) is established, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed). Information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the decorative symbol variable display) in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). It is. When a plurality of first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 in the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (in order from the right as viewed from the player) The start condition for the variable display is satisfied.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second reserved display number 30TM002 in the number corresponding to the second reserved memory number in the second reserved display area 30TM102. That is, the second hold display 30TM002 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, although the start condition (for example, the winning to the second start winning opening) is satisfied, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed). And the information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol (and the decorative symbol variable display) in which the second reserved memory number is not 0). When a plurality of second hold displays 30TM002 are displayed in the second hold display area 30TM102, they correspond to the second hold display 30TM002 in the order close to the active display area 30TM103 (in order from the left as viewed from the player). The start condition for the variable display is satisfied.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the active display 30TM003 in the active display area 30TM103 when the decorative symbol variation display is being executed. That is, the active display 30TM003 indicates that the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed after the start condition (for example, winning to the first start winning port or the second starting winning port) is established, and the big hit game It is information corresponding to the special symbol variation display (and the decorative symbol variation display) in which the state is not controlled and the number of reserved memories is not zero).

  In addition, the upper part of the screen of the image display device 5 (left side as viewed from the player) is an area different from the first hold display area 30TM101, and stores the first hold storage number (0-4 sub hold display 30TM004). A sub-hold display area 30TM104 for displaying and a sub-active display area 30TM105 for displaying a sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the currently displayed variable display are provided, which are different from the active display area 30TM103.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the secondary hold display 30TM004 is to be displayed at the time of start winning (when the winning to the first start winning opening occurs), in the secondary hold display area 30TM104. A number of sub-hold displays 30TM004 corresponding to the number of one hold storage are displayed, and a sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. That is, the sub-hold display 30TM004 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, although the start condition (for example, winning to the first start winning opening) is established, but the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed). And the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0), which corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the secondary active display 30TM005 is controlled to the big hit gaming state because the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed) after the start condition (for example, the winning to the first start winning opening) is established. This is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the decorative symbol variable display) in which the second reserved memory number is 0 and the first reserved memory number is not 0). When a plurality of sub-holding display areas 30TM004 are displayed in the sub-holding display area 30TM104, the variation corresponding to the sub-holding display 30TM004 is performed in the order close to the subactive display area 30TM105 (from the right when viewed from the player). The display start condition is satisfied.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10A, the secondary reserved display 30TM004 has a star-shaped outline, and has a different outline from the first reserved display 30TM001 (round display or triangular display). The sub-holding display 30TM004 is less noticeable because it is smaller in size than the first holding display 30TM001, and has low visibility for the player. The sub-active display 30TM005 is also a star-shaped outline, which is different from the active display 30TM003 (round display or triangular display). The sub-active display 30TM005 has a smaller display size than the active display 30TM003, so that it is not noticeable and has low visibility for the player.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10A, the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and the sub-active is displayed in response to the variable display of the middle left and right decorative symbols being executed in the image display device 5. In the display area 30TM105, a sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed. In this way, as information corresponding to the one variation display (common variation display) being executed, information in different modes of the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed. That is, the active display 30TM003 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the common variable display and the variable display corresponding to the active display 30TM003 are simultaneously displayed on the screen.

  Corresponding to the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, four first hold displays 30TM001 are displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101 and four sub-hold displays are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. 30TM004 is displayed. Thus, as information corresponding to each of the four variable displays that have not yet been executed, information in different modes, the first hold display 30TM001 and the sub hold display 30TM004, is displayed. That is, one first hold display 30TM001, a variable display (hold storage) corresponding to the first first hold display 30TM001, and one sub hold display 30TM004 corresponding to a common variable display (hold storage) are simultaneously displayed. It will be displayed on the screen.

  In this way, a plurality of types of hold display (first hold display 30TM001, secondary hold display 30TM004) corresponding to the common change display (change display of the first special symbol) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. It is possible to improve the interest by diversifying the production using the hold display. Similarly, a plurality of types of active displays (active display 30TM003, sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to the currently running change display (first special symbol change display, decorative symbol change display) are displayed on the same screen at the same time. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest by diversifying the production using the active display.

  Here, as will be described later, when it is determined not to display the secondary hold display 30TM004 in the determination at the start winning prize, the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101, The sub-hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104. In addition, while the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, the subactive display area 30TM105 does not display the subactive display 30TM005, and further indicates that the subactive display 30TM005 should be displayed. Information (rectangular frame shown in the upper part of the screen in FIG. 10-1) is not displayed either.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the first change effect and / or the second change effect can be executed based on the determination result at the time of starting winning. The first change effect is a special mode that is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white round display) of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the start winning prize. (In this example, white triangle display), blue mode (in this example, blue round display), green mode (in this example, green round display), red mode (in this example, red round shape) Display) or a notice effect that is displayed in a golden form (in this example, a golden round display). Further, the second change effect is different from the normal mode (in this example, the white star display), the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning. The notice effect is displayed in a blue mode (in this example, a blue star display) or a red mode (in this example, a red star display).

  FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing the change effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes a change effect determination process in the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the change effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets a command (for example, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a first command) at the time of the start winning based on the occurrence of the starting winning at the first starting winning opening. It is confirmed whether or not a new “1 reserved memory number addition designation command” has been received (step S30TM1010).

  The symbol designating command is an effect control command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot will be based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and determines the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot and designates the determination result Outputs the specified command. The variation category command is an effect control command that indicates a variation pattern determination result among the winning determination results. Based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, the CPU 103 determines whether or not normal reach, super reach or the like, and outputs a variation category command for designating the determination result To do. The first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first reserved memory number has increased by one.

  Specifically, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved memory number addition designation command) is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. To do. If one set of start winning command is not newly received (NO in step S30TM1010), the process is terminated.

  If one set of commands at the time of start winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the change prohibition flag is set (step S30TM1020). If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is. As will be described later, the change prohibition flag is set based on the determination that at least the first change effect is executed. If the change prohibition flag is set (YES in step S30TM1020), the process ends as it is.

  If the change prohibition flag is not set (NO in step S30TM1020), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first change effect is executed and the final display mode, whether or not the second change effect is executed and the final display mode, which will be described later. It determines based on a display mode determination table (refer FIG. 10-3) (step S30TM1030).

  By executing the processing of step S30TM1010 and step S30TM1020, in this embodiment, only when the first change effect is not executed, the process after step S30TM1030 is executed, and the first change effect is executed. Alternatively, the second change effect can be executed.

  FIG. 10C is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the active display 30TM003, “normal mode”, “special mode”, “blue mode”, “green mode”, “red mode” ”And“ golden aspect ”can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005, “no display”, “normal mode”, “blue mode”, and “red mode” Any one of these can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these modes. Of these, “no display” indicates that the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104 and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105.

  As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “displacement” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “disconnecting”), the start winning is concerned. The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display based on (new first reserved memory) becomes a normal mode (white round display) at a rate of 31%, and a special mode (white display) at a rate of 4%. Triangular display), a blue mode (blue round display) at a rate of 18%, a green mode (green round display) at a rate of 21%, and a red mode (red round display at a rate of 16%) ) And a golden aspect (golden round shape display) at a rate of 10%. That is, the first change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the start winning prize is different from the normal mode (white round display) is 69. % Will be executed.

  On the other hand, when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “big hit”), it is based on the starting winning (new first hold memory). The final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display is a normal mode at a rate of 2%, a special mode at a rate of 3%, a blue mode at a rate of 15%, a green mode at a rate of 20%, It becomes a red aspect at a ratio of 25% and a golden aspect at a ratio of 35%. That is, the first change effect in which the aspect of the information (holding display or active display) corresponding to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is different from the normal aspect is executed at a rate of 98%. It will be.

  Thus, when the 1st change production is performed, the ratio which becomes a big hit is high compared with the case where the 1st change production is not performed. In addition, when the first change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is a gold mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes the highest. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), with regard to the display mode of the active display 30TM003, the expected degree of winning is a relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <green mode <red mode <gold color mode. .

  In addition, as shown in the change pattern of the first change effect described later, the display mode is different from the normal mode, the blue mode, or the red mode at the stage of the first hold display 30TM001 before the active display 30TM003. It may become. When the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (when it is displayed as the active display 30TM003), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display mode with higher expectation than that. To change. Therefore, regarding the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001, the expectation level that is a big hit has the relationship of normal mode <special mode <blue mode <red mode.

  As shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the ratio at which the special mode is selected as the final display mode for active display is extremely lower than the ratio at which other modes are selected. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, which will be described later, the ratio in which the special mode is included in the change pattern of the hold display is not so low as compared with the ratio in which the other mode is included. Therefore, when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode, the rate of change in the display mode is higher than when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in another mode. The player cannot expect a big hit when the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a special mode as compared with the case where the first display 30TM001 is displayed in a blue mode or a red mode, but the display mode has a higher expectation. It can be expected to change to a display mode (blue mode, red mode).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “out of” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “out”), The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first hold memory) are not displayed at the rate of 70% but are displayed at the rate of 30%. The ratio that the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio that the final display mode becomes the blue mode (blue star display) is 4%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (sub-holding display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The ratio is 1%. In other words, the information corresponding to the variable display (the hold display or the active display) that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is displayed at a rate of 30%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the determination target at the time of starting winning. The second change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 5%.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), when the determination result at the time of starting winning is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result specified by the symbol designating command is “big hit”), The sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display based on the start winning (new first hold memory) are not displayed at the rate of 40% but are displayed at the rate of 60%. The ratio that the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed and the final display mode is the normal mode (white star display) is 25%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (secondary hold display 30TM004) is displayed, and The ratio at which the final display mode becomes the blue mode (blue star display) is 10%, the secondary active display 30TM005 (sub-holding display 30TM004) is displayed, and the final display mode is the red mode (red star display). The ratio is 25%. In other words, the information corresponding to the variable display (the hold display or the active display) that is the determination target at the start winning prize is displayed at a rate of 60%, and corresponds to the variable display that is the determination target at the start winning prize The second change effect in which the mode of the information (holding display or active display) is different from the normal mode (white star display) is executed at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, when the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed, the ratio of big hits is higher than when the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are not displayed. Moreover, when the 2nd change production is performed, the ratio which becomes a big hit is high compared with the case where a 2nd change production is not performed. Further, when the second change effect is executed, when the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is a red mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes the highest. As shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), regarding the display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005, the expectation level that is a big hit has the relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Moreover, as shown in the change pattern of the 2nd change production mentioned later, in the stage of the subpending display 30TM004 before the subactive display 30TM005, when a display mode turns into a blue mode or a red mode different from a normal mode There is. When the secondary hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105 (when displayed as the secondary active display 30TM005), at least the display mode is the same as that before the active shift or a display with higher expectation than that. It changes to the aspect. Therefore, regarding the display mode of the sub-holding display 30TM004, the expectation level that is a big hit has the relationship of normal mode <blue mode <red mode.

  Here, in the process of step S30TM1030, the CPU 120 for effect control determines (1) to execute the first change effect (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is set to a mode different from the normal mode), and the second There is a case where it is determined to execute the change effect (the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 is different from the normal mode).

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control may decide to execute (2-1) the first change effect and not to display the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005. Further, (2-2) it is decided to execute the first change effect, and the secondary change display 30TM004 and the subactive display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is normally set). It may be decided to be an aspect.

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control determines that (3) the first change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 is set to the normal mode), and the second change effect is executed (sub-hold display 30TM004 and The sub-active display 30TM005 may be displayed and the final display mode of the sub-active display 30TM005 may be determined to be different from the normal mode.

  In addition, the CPU 120 for effect control may determine (4-1) not to execute the first change effect, and may not display the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005. Also, (4-2) it is decided not to execute the first change effect, and the secondary change display 30TM004 and the subactive display 30TM005 are displayed, but the second change effect is not executed (the final display mode of the subactive display 30TM005 is normally set). It may be decided to be an aspect.

  In the process of step S30TM1030, the effect control CPU 120 determines that neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is to be executed (NO in step S30TM1040), that is, the above (4-1) and ( If any one of the cases 4-2) is applicable, the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold storage) is displayed in the normal mode. The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) does not change from the normal mode to another mode, and after the variable display corresponding to the first hold memory is started, The active display 30TM003 corresponding to is not changed from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, the change patterns 101, 201, when the final display mode is the “normal mode”, 301, 401).

  In addition, when corresponding to said (4-2), although the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to a new start winning (1st hold memory) is displayed, the display mode changes from a normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first reserved storage is started, the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the first display does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 10-6). And change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is the “normal mode”).

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1040), that is, (1), (2-1) and (2) above. -2) and when it corresponds to either (3), the change pattern of the change effect is determined as shown below.

  When it is decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1050), that is, in the case of (1) above, in step S30TM1060, the updated first The change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the number of reserved memories (first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined active display 30TM003 ( 10-4 and FIG. 10-5), the updated first pending storage number (the first pending storage number after receiving the first pending memory number addition designation command), and the determined secondary active display 30TM005. The change pattern of the second change effect is determined based on the final display mode (see FIG. 10-6).

  When the CPU 120 for effect control executes the first change effect and decides not to execute the second change effect (YES in step S30TM1110), that is, the above (2-1) and (2-2). In any case, in step S30TM1120, the updated first reserved memory number (first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final of the determined active display 30TM003 A change pattern of the first change effect is determined based on the display mode (see FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5). In addition, when it corresponds to the above (2-2), the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning (first hold memory) is displayed, but the display mode changes from the normal mode to another mode. Even after the variable display corresponding to the first reserved storage is started, the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the first display does not change from the normal mode to another mode (shown in FIG. 10-6). And change patterns 601, 701, 801, and 901 when the final display mode is “normal mode”).

  If the CPU 120 for effect control decides not to execute the first change effect but to execute the second change effect (NO in step S30TM1110), that is, if it corresponds to the above (3), step In S30TM1210, based on the updated first reserved memory number (first reserved memory number after receiving the first reserved memory number addition designation command) and the final display mode of the determined secondary active display 30TM005, the second The change pattern of the change effect is determined (see FIG. 10-6).

  When the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute at least one of the first change effect and the second change effect (any of (1), (2-1), (2-2), and (3) above) If this is the case, a prefetch counter is set (step S30TM1070, step S30TM1130, step S30TM1220). In addition, although neither notice effect of a 1st change effect and a 2nd change effect is performed, when sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to a new start prize (1st holding memory) is displayed (above (4-2)). Also set the prefetch counter if applicable.

  A value corresponding to the first reserved memory number updated based on the start winning prize (a value specified by the first reserved memory number designation command) is set in the prefetch counter, and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Each time (every time the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command is received), the value of the prefetch counter is decremented by one. That is, the value of the prefetch counter is subtracted every time the first hold display 30TM001 or the sub hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the hold storage that is the determination target at the time of starting winning is shifted. Then, when the value of the prefetch counter becomes 0, the variable display (or the secondary change display 30TM004 is displayed although the second change effect is not executed, which is the target of the first change effect and / or the second change effect). (Variable display) is executed.

  Further, when it is determined that the first change effect is to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 sets a change prohibition flag (steps S30TM1080 and S30TM1140). During the period when the change prohibition flag is set, even if a new start prize is generated, it is determined as YES in the above-described step S30TM1020, thereby corresponding to the new start prize (new first reserved memory). Neither the first change effect nor the second change effect is executed, and the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the new start prize (new first hold memory) are not displayed. The change prohibition flag is cleared when the variation display that is the target of the first change effect ends.

  10-4 and 10-5 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the first change effect. When the first reserved memory number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the nth first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. (Ii) The first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start win shifts the change ranking in the first hold display area 30TM101 to a higher position (active display area 30TM103 side). Timing (when n ≧ 2) and (iii) timing at which the first hold display 30TM001 corresponding to the start prize is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (timing at which the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start prize is displayed) ), Display information (pending display or Active display) might be displayed in a different manner from the normal manner.

  10-4 and 10-5, what is the display information (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) corresponding to the variable display at each timing of (i) to (iii) for each change pattern. The display mode is shown. In the change patterns shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white round display, and “special” indicates a special mode that is a white triangular display. “Blue” indicates a blue mode which is a blue round display, and “Red” indicates a red mode which is a red round display.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 101 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). The change pattern 101 is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning and then the first hold display to be notified is changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  10-4 and 10-5, the active shift means that the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted from the first hold display area 30TM101 to the active display area 30TM103 (as a result, at the time of starting winning The active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display to be determined is displayed).

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later). After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, A determination value is assigned to each change pattern 103. The change pattern 102 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display subject to notice is displayed in a special manner at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display subject to notice is changed in a special manner at the timing of active shift.

  Here, when the special mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the active shift timing (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later). After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the special mode. In addition, when a special mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is selected at the timing of active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 remains unchanged in a special mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and the change pattern 101, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively. The change pattern 104 is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is displayed in a special form at the time of a start winning prize, and then the first hold display to be notified is changed to a blue form at the timing of active shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display subject to notice is displayed in blue in the start winning prize, and then the first hold display subject to notice is changed in blue in the active shift timing.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, a change pattern 201, a change pattern 301, and a change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. In addition, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, change pattern 402) ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403) And 404), the active display 30TM003 remains blue after the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, and the change pattern 105, respectively.

  Here, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is in the active shift timing (change pattern 101, change pattern 201, change pattern 301, and change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ) After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the green mode. Further, when the green mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue color to the green color.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, and the change pattern 101, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively. The change pattern 106 is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is displayed in a blue color at the time of winning a start, and then the first hold display to be notified is changed to a red color at an active shift timing. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display subject to advance notice is displayed in a red color at the time of start winning and then the first hold display subject to advance notice remains in the red color at the time of active shift.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401 described later), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, and change pattern 403). And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the blue color to the red color. In addition, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405). In the case of ˜412), the active display 30TM003 does not change in red after the active shift.

  As for the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, the change pattern 101, the change pattern 102, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 103, the change pattern 104, the change pattern 105, the change pattern 106, and the change pattern 107, respectively.

  Here, when the gold color mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 101, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 301, and the change pattern 401, which will be described later). After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the normal mode to the gold mode. Further, when the gold color mode is determined as the final display mode and the special mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 102 and 103, change patterns 202 to 204 described later, change pattern 302, and change pattern 402) ), After the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the special mode to the gold mode. In addition, when the gold color mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue color mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 104 and 105, change patterns 205 to 208 described later, change patterns 303 to 305, change pattern 403 And 404), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from a blue color to a gold color. In addition, when the gold mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 106 and 107, change patterns 209 to 212 described later, change patterns 306 to 310, and change pattern 405). In the case of ˜412), after the active shift, the active display 30TM003 finally changes from the red color to the gold color.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved data shown in FIG. Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 201 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). In the change pattern 201, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is not changed. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st hold | maintenance display of notice object also in a normal mode also at timing.

  When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 203 and the change pattern 204, respectively. In the change pattern 202, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift is not changed. The change pattern 203 changes the first hold display of the notice target in a special manner at the timing, and the change pattern 203 indicates the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the normal form at the time of starting winning a prize. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the advance notice object is changed to a special mode and the first hold display of the advance notice object is not changed in the special form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in a special mode, the first hold display to be notified changes in the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift. Without a change pattern remains unchanged at special embodiment the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  When the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208. The change pattern 205 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 206 is a change pattern that changes the first hold display of the advance notice target to a blue mode. The change pattern 206 displays the first hold display of the advance notice target in a special form at the time of winning a start, and then notifies at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 207 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the target is changed to a blue form at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the target in a special mode. After the 1 hold display is displayed in a special mode, the first hold display to be notified is changed to a blue mode at the timing of the 1st hold shift and The change pattern 208 is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the blue state at the time of the shift shift, and the change pattern 208 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the blue form when starting winning a prize and then holds the first hold display. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in blue at the shift timing, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in blue at the active shift timing.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the determination result at the time of winning a start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or jackpot) A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, and the change pattern 208.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a red mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, depending on the determination result at the time of winning a start (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or jackpot) A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212. ing. In the change pattern 209, the first hold display subject to notice is displayed in a special manner at the time of winning a start, and then the first hold indication subject to notice is changed to a blue form at the timing of the first hold shift, and at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 210 is a change pattern that changes the first hold display to be notified in a red form, and the change pattern 210 displays the first hold display to be notified in blue form at the time of winning a start and then notifies the first hold shift at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 211 is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the first hold display of the target in the blue form. After the first hold display is displayed in blue, the first hold display to be notified is changed to red at the timing of the first hold shift, and The change pattern 212 is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red state at the time of the shift, and the change pattern 212 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the red form at the start winning, and then the first hold display. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in red at the shift timing, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in red at the active shift timing.

  As for the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, and the change pattern 201, the change pattern 202, A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 203, the change pattern 204, the change pattern 205, the change pattern 206, the change pattern 207, the change pattern 208, the change pattern 209, the change pattern 210, the change pattern 211, and the change pattern 212. ing.

  When the first reserved memory count stored in the first reserved memory count storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three holds shown in FIG. 10-5 (C). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 301 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of date or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). In the change pattern 301, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the normal mode at the hold shift timing, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the normal mode at the active shift timing.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 301 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or big hit). Each determination value is assigned to 302. In the change pattern 302, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special mode at the timing of, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the special form even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a blue mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively. In the change pattern 303, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in a special manner at the timing of the change, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display for the advance notice is displayed in the normal mode, the first hold display for the advance notice is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold display of the advance notice is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to blue and the first hold display subject to notice is not changed in blue at the active shift timing. In pattern 305, the first hold display subject to notice is displayed in blue when the start prize is received, and then the first hold display subject to notice is not changed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in blue in the timing of the shift, and the first hold display in advance is not changed in the blue in the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, and the change pattern 305, respectively.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively. The change pattern 306 shows the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is changed to a blue color at the timing of the change, and the first hold display to be notified is changed to a red color at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in blue, the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first notice of the notice is also displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. It is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift without changing the hold display in the blue form. The display pattern 308 displays the first hold display of the notice target in blue when the winning prize is received, and does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift. A change pattern 309 is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is changed to a red color at a hold shift timing and the first hold display to be notified is not changed to a red color at an active shift timing. Sometimes the first hold display for the advance notice is displayed in blue, and the first hold display for the advance notice is changed to red at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern which does not change the 1 hold display in the red form without changing the 1 hold display in the red form at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 310 does not change the first hold display of the notice target in the red form at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the first hold display of the notice target in the red form at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the first hold display to be notified is not changed in red at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in red at the active shift timing.

  As for the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 301, the change pattern 302, and the change pattern 301, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designation command, the off or the big hit) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 303, the change pattern 304, the change pattern 305, the change pattern 306, the change pattern 307, the change pattern 308, the change pattern 309, and the change pattern 310, respectively.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved data shown in FIG. 10-5 (D). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 401 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of date or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). In the change pattern 401, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The first hold display subject to advance notice is not changed in the normal mode at the hold shift timing, and the first hold display subject to advance notice is not changed in the normal form at the third hold shift timing. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st hold | maintenance display of notice object with a normal mode.

  When the determined final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 401 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of 402. In the change pattern 402, the first hold display of the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift and the second hold shift is performed. The first hold display subject to notice is not changed in a special manner at the timing of the previous notice, and the first hold display subject to notice is not changed in a special manner even at the timing of the third hold shift, and is subject to notice at the active shift timing. It is a change pattern which does not change the 1st hold display of No. with a special mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively. The change pattern 403 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then changes the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the advance notice object is changed to a blue color at the timing of the first change, and the first hold display of the advance notice object is not changed in the blue form at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first change display of the advance notice object is also changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 404 is a change pattern that does not change the blue display in the 1 hold display, and the change pattern 404 displays the first hold display to be notified in the blue form at the time of winning a start, and then displays the first display of the notification target at the timing of the first hold shift. The first hold display is not changed in the blue mode, and the first hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the second hold shift. Without change from the first hold display blue aspects notice object in the timing of the hold shift, a change pattern remains unchanged blue embodiments the first hold display notice object in the timing of the active shift.

  Regarding the case where the determined final display mode is the green mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403 and the change pattern 404, respectively.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, and the change patterns 405 to 412, respectively. The change pattern 405 displays the first hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then changes the first hold display of the notice target to the special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold shift. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in a special manner at the timing of the first change, but the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a blue form at the timing of the third hold shift, and the first notice display of the notice target is changed at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 406 is a change pattern that changes the 1-hold display to a red mode, and the change pattern 406 displays the first hold-display subject to be notified in the normal mode at the time of starting winning a prize, and then displays the first target-notify at the timing of the first hold shift. Change the hold display to a special mode, change the first hold display to be notified in blue at the timing of the second hold shift, and change the timing of the third hold shift The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the time of the shift, and the first hold display of the notice target is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift. After the target first hold display is displayed in the normal mode, the first hold display of the notification target is changed to a special mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the first hold of the target is displayed at the timing of the second hold shift. Change the display to blue, change the first hold display to be notified in red at the timing of the third hold shift, and change the first hold display to be notified in red in the active shift timing The change pattern 408 is the first hold, the second hold, and the third hold after the first hold display subject to notice is displayed in blue when the start prize is received. The first hold display of the notice target is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the shift, and the first hold display of the notification target is changed to the red form at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 409 is the start winning prize. Sometimes the first hold display for the advance notice is displayed in blue, and the first hold display for the advance notice remains unchanged in the blue form at the first and second hold shift timings. Is a change pattern in which the first hold display of the notice target is changed to a red form and the first hold display of the notice target is not changed in a red form at the timing of the active shift. After the first hold display is displayed in blue, the first hold display to be notified is changed in blue in the timing of the first hold shift. Without changing, the first hold display of the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the second hold shift, and the first hold display of the notice target remains in the red form at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. The change pattern 411 is a change pattern that does not change. The first hold display of the notice target is displayed in blue when the start winning is received, and then the first hold display of the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 412 is a change pattern that does not change the first hold display of the notice target in red in the second and third hold shift timings and the active shift timing. After displaying the hold display in red, the timing of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd hold shifts, the timing of the active shift Also grayed is without changing the change pattern of the red aspect the first hold display notice object.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the gold mode, the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, and the change pattern 401, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) A determination value is assigned to each of the change pattern 403, the change pattern 404, the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, the change pattern 408, the change pattern 409, the change pattern 410, the change pattern 411, and the change pattern 412. ing.

  FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a change pattern determination table for determining a change pattern of the second change effect. When the first reserved memory number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning prize and it is decided to display the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005, (i ) The 1st to n-th sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the first hold storage number n at that time is displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104, and the sub-active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display being executed at that time is displayed as the sub-hold display 30TM004. Timing displayed in the active display area 30TM105 (timing at the time of starting winning), (ii) the sub-holding display 30TM004 corresponding to the starting win is the position where the change rank in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 is higher (sub-active display area 30TM105) Side)) (when n ≧ 2), and (iii) The display corresponding to the variable display based on the start prize at the timing when the secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the dynamic prize is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105 (the timing when the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the start prize is displayed). Information (holding display or active display) may be displayed in a mode different from the normal mode.

  In FIG. 10-6, for each change pattern, at what timing (i) to (iii), the display mode (sub-hold display 30TM004 or sub-active display 30TM005) corresponding to variable display is displayed. Is shown. In the change pattern shown in FIG. 10-6, “normal” indicates a normal mode that is a white star display, and “blue” indicates a blue mode that is a blue star display. “Red” indicates a red aspect which is a red star display.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for one hold shown in FIG. 10-6 (A). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 601 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined by The change pattern 601 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the active shift.

  In the description of FIG. 10-6, the active shift means that the sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted from the sub-hold display area 30TM104 to the sub-active display area 30TM105 (as a result, the variation that is the determination target at the start winning prize) The secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the display is displayed).

  Here, when the normal mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901, which will be described later). After the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 remains unchanged in the normal mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a blue mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or big hit) A determination value is assigned to each change pattern 603. The change pattern 602 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning, and then the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to advance notice is displayed in a blue color at the time of winning, and then the sub-holding display subject to advance notice is not changed in the blue state at the timing of active shift.

  Here, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the sub active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the blue mode. Further, when the blue mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, change patterns 902 described later). In the case of ˜905), after the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in a blue state.

  When the determined final display mode is a red mode, the change pattern 601, the change pattern 602, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 603, the change pattern 604, and the change pattern 605, respectively. The change pattern 604 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is displayed in a blue color at the time of start winning, and then the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to a red color at the timing of active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to advance notice is displayed in red when winning a prize, and then the sub-holding display subject to notice is kept red in the active shift timing.

  Here, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the normal mode is set at the timing of the active shift (in the case of the change pattern 601, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 801, and the change pattern 901 described later), After the active shift, the secondary active display 30TM005 finally changes from the normal mode to the red mode. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the blue mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 602 and 603, change patterns 702 to 704, change patterns 802 to 804, change patterns 902 described later). In the case of ˜905), after the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 changes from the blue color to the red color. Further, when the red mode is determined as the final display mode and the red mode is set at the timing of the active shift (change patterns 604 and 605, change patterns 705 to 708 to be described later, change patterns 805 to 808, and change pattern 906. In the case of ˜912), after the active shift, the sub-active display 30TM005 does not change in a red state.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the two reserved data shown in FIG. 10-6 (B). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 701 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). The change pattern 701 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. It is a change pattern which does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode.

  When the determined final display mode is a blue mode, a change pattern 701, a change pattern 702, and a change pattern 702, depending on the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 703 and the change pattern 704, respectively. The change pattern 702 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, but at the active shift timing. The change pattern 703 is a change pattern that changes the sub-holding display for the notice target to a blue mode. The change pattern 703 displays the sub-hold display for the notice target in the normal mode at the time of starting winning a prize, and then at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 704 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display is changed to a blue mode, and the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in the blue mode at the timing of the active shift. After the display, the sub-hold display to be notified is displayed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift and the active shift. A change pattern remains unchanged at like.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 701, the change pattern 702, depending on the determination result at the start winning prize (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot), Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 703, the change pattern 704, and the change patterns 705 to 708, respectively. The change pattern 705 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, changes the sub-holding display subject to notice to the blue mode at the timing of the first holding shift, The change pattern 706 is a change pattern that changes the sub-holding display in red to the notice-target sub-hold at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-holding display subject to notice in blue in the start winning prize. The change pattern 707 changes the sub-holding display subject to notice to the red form at the time of active shift without changing the display in the blue form. After the display, the sub-hold display to be notified is changed to red at the timing of the first hold shift, and the active shift Is a change pattern that does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the red mode in the ming, and the change pattern 708 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in red when the start prize is received, and the timing of the first hold shift, It is a change pattern which does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the red mode at the timing of active shift.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the three reserved data shown in FIG. 10-6 (C). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 801 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, being out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). The change pattern 801 is the second hold shift without changing the notice sub-hold display in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after displaying the sub-hold display for the previous notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the same, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the normal mode even at the timing of the active shift.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 801 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the 802 to the change pattern 804. The change pattern 802 is the second hold shift without changing the notice sub-hold display in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift after the sub-hold display for the notice target is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning. Is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to a blue color at the timing of and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the blue color at the timing of the active shift, and the change pattern 803 After the secondary hold display is displayed in the normal mode, the secondary hold display to be notified changes to blue at the timing of the first hold shift, and the secondary hold of the notification target is displayed at the second hold shift timing and active shift timing. The change pattern 804 is a change pattern that does not change in a blue state, and the change pattern 804 is a sub-holding display subject to notice at the time of start winning. After displayed in blue manner, first time, for the second time hold shift, a change pattern that does not change the sub-hold display notice object at the timing of the active shift remains blue aspect.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the red mode, the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, and the change pattern 801, the change pattern 802, according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or big hit) Determination values are assigned to the change pattern 803, the change pattern 804, and the change patterns 805 to 808, respectively. The change pattern 805 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then changes the sub-holding display subject to notice to the blue mode at the timing of the first holding shift, and the timing of the second holding shift Is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to a red form and the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to a red form at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in blue, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift, but the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to red at the timing of the second hold shift. The change pattern 807 is a change pattern that does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in a red state at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the secondary hold display for the advance notice in blue when the start prize is received, the secondary hold display for the advance notice is changed to the red form at the timing of the first hold shift, the timing of the second hold shift, the active shift The change pattern 808 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in red at the timing, and the change pattern 808 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in red when starting winning a prize, and then the first and second hold shifts. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in a red state at the timing of the active shift.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern for the four reserved data shown in FIG. 10-6 (D). Select a table.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is the normal mode, the probability that the change pattern 901 is 100% regardless of the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Judgment values are assigned as determined in (1). The change pattern 901 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the timing of the first, second, third hold shift, and active shift. This is a change pattern that does not change.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a blue mode, the change pattern 901 and the change pattern are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command is out of place or big hit). A determination value is assigned to each of the change patterns 905 to 902. The change pattern 902 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and does not change the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the timing of the first and second hold shifts. The sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to a blue color at the timing of the holding shift, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the blue color at the timing of the active shift. After displaying the secondary hold display for the advance notice in the normal mode, the secondary hold display for the advance notice is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift, and the secondary hold for the advance notice is displayed at the second hold shift timing. The display is changed to blue, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is displayed in blue at the timing of the third hold shift and active shift. The change pattern 904 is a change pattern that does not change, and the change pattern 904 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then changes the sub-holding display subject to notice to the blue mode at the timing of the first hold shift The change pattern 905 is a change pattern that does not change the secondary hold display of the notice target in the blue mode at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the blue state at the timing of the first, second, third hold shift, and active shift after being displayed in the mode.

  In the case where the determined final display mode is a red mode, the change pattern 901 to the change pattern 905 are determined according to the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or big hit) In addition, determination values are assigned to the change patterns 906 to 912, respectively. The change pattern 906 displays the secondary hold display for the advance notice in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and the secondary hold display for the advance target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first hold shift. The sub-holding display for the notice target is changed to blue at the timing of the change, the sub-hold display for the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the third hold shift, and the sub-hold display for the notice target is changed to red at the timing of the active shift. The change pattern 907 is a change pattern that does not change in the form. The change pattern 907 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in the normal form at the time of the start winning, and then changes the sub-holding display subject to notice to the blue form at the timing of the first hold shift Change the timing of the second hold shift without changing the secondary hold display to be notified in the blue state at the timing of the second hold shift. The change target 908 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display for the advance notice is changed to a red form, and the sub-hold display for the advance notice is not changed in the red form at the timing of the active shift. Is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to the blue mode at the timing of the first holding shift, the sub-holding display subject to notification is changed to the red mode at the timing of the second holding shift, The change pattern 909 is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display subject to notice is not changed in red at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift, and the change pattern 909 displays the sub-hold display subject to notice in blue in the start winning prize. After that, the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in blue at the timing of the first and second holding shifts. The sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to red at the timing of the eye-holding shift, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is changed to remain red in the timing of the active shift. Sometimes the sub-holding display subject to notice is displayed in blue, and the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in blue at the timing of the first hold shift, and the sub-display of the subject of notice is changed at the timing of the second hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display is changed to red and the sub-hold display to be notified is not changed in red at the timing of the third hold shift and the active shift. After displaying the secondary hold display in blue, the secondary hold display subject to notice is red at the timing of the first hold shift. The change pattern 912 is a change pattern in which the sub-holding display subject to notice is not changed in the red form at the timing of the second and third hold shifts and the timing of the active shift. This is a change pattern in which the sub-hold display to be notified remains unchanged in the red mode at the first, second, and third hold shift timings and the active shift timing after the sub-hold display is displayed in red.

  As shown in FIG. 10C, the ratio of the first change effect that displays the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 in a display mode different from the normal mode is the sub-hold display 30TM004 or the sub-active display 30TM005. Is higher than the rate at which the second change effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-3, when the second change effect is executed, the ratio of being a big hit is higher than when the first change effect is executed.

  In this way, at the lower part of the screen, the player with respect to the notice effect is executed by frequently executing the first change effect that changes the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 or the active display 30TM003 with high visibility. Can sustain interest. On the other hand, regarding the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 having low visibility, since the ratio of the big hit differs depending on whether or not it is displayed at the top of the screen, the player Attention is paid to whether or not the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed. Furthermore, whether or not the display mode changes when the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 are displayed because the expectation of jackpot when the second change effect is executed is higher than the first change effect. Will also pay attention to.

  In the present embodiment, a round or triangular icon (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) displayed at the bottom of the screen and a star icon (second hold display 30TM004 or subactive displayed at the top of the screen). The size and shape of the display 30TM005) are different. That is, a plurality of types of icons corresponding to the common hold storage and the common variable display are simultaneously displayed at different display positions on the same screen. In this example, one of the two types of icons (first hold display 30TM001 or active display 30TM003) is displayed in a round shape, and the other icon (second hold display 30TM004 or subactive display 30TM005) is displayed in a star shape. Thus, the feature of each icon is clarified so that the player can easily grasp the difference (that is, different types of display information). Moreover, the effect by the icon corresponding to a change display can be diversified, and an interest can be improved.

  In addition, the common display color corresponding to the common variable display, such as the relationship between the red first hold display 30TM001 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red display sub hold display 30TM004 displayed at the top of the screen. Icons may be displayed at the same time (however, the icons are different for round and star shapes). Thereby, the variable display which is the target of the first change effect and the second change effect becomes clearer in the first hold display area 30TM101 and the sub hold display area 30TM104, and the first change effect and the second change effect are displayed. It becomes easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the target variation display.

  Further, a common display color icon corresponding to the variable display being executed, such as the relationship between the red active display 30TM003 displayed at the bottom of the screen and the red secondary active display 30TM005 displayed at the top of the screen. (However, the icons are different for round and star shapes). This makes it easier for the player to understand the jackpot expectation regarding the variable display during execution.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-4 to 10-6, the big hit expectation differs depending on the combination of the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 and the display color of the sub hold display 30TM004 (for example, in the red mode) The combination of the first hold display 30TM001 and the red-type sub-hold display 30TM004 has the highest jackpot expectation), and the player is interested in both of the hold display modes. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production that changes the aspect.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-3, the big hit expectation degree differs depending on the combination of the display color of the active display 30TM003 and the display color of the sub-active display 30TM005 (for example, the gold-colored active display 30TM003 is different from the red-colored active display 30TM003). (The combination of the secondary active display 30TM005 has the highest expectation level for big hits), and the player is interested in both aspects of the active display, and enhances the interest of the effect of changing the display aspect of the active display. be able to.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 (the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the first change effect is displayed). When displayed, the display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is succeeded during active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. Thereby, the player can be interested in how the first hold display 30TM001 changes.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the secondary hold display 30TM004 is shifted to the secondary active display area 30TM105 (when the secondary active display 30TM005 corresponding to the variable display targeted for the second change effect is displayed). ), The display color is at least the same (that is, the display color is taken over during active shift), or the display color changes to a higher expectation. Thus, the player can be interested in how the secondary hold display 30TM004 changes.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10C, the active display 30TM003 with high visibility is provided with more display modes than the sub-active display 30TM005 with low visibility. As shown in FIGS. 10-4 to 10-6, the change pattern when changing the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001 with high visibility changes the form of the sub hold display 30TM004 with low visibility. More change patterns are provided. In this way, the first change effect and the second change effect can be prevented while changing the type of the executable effect and the effect pattern depending on the visibility of the active display and the hold display, and preventing the effect from becoming excessively complicated. Appropriately enhance the interest of change production.

(Specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect)
Next, specific examples of the first change effect and the second change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-7 to 10-9. FIG. 10-7 is a time chart when executing both the first change effect and the second change effect. FIGS. 10-8 and 10-9 show both the first change effect and the second change effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when performing.

  First, in FIG. 10-8 (1), when the first reserved storage number is 3, the display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is started (timing T1 shown in FIG. 10-7). (Variation display) is being executed. At this time, a normal mode active display 30TM003 (white round display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and a normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white round display) is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed. At this time, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Further, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the image display device 5 is performing the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (2) (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-7), a new prize is awarded. It is assumed that a start winning for the ball device 6A has occurred and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start prize that is the determination target (in this example, the gold mode) When the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is determined to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning that is the determination target The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the remaining number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  In addition, based on the decision to execute the second change effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal active secondary active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the secondary active display area 30TM105, and the secondary active display 30TM105. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed at this time corresponds to the variable display of the decorative symbol (first special symbol) currently being executed. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 10-7 and FIG. 10-8 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning (first reserved memory) that occurs after this is prohibited. In the execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect, the first hold display 30TM001 that is the target of the first change effect is displayed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 that is the target of the second change effect is displayed). ), The period until the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 (the sub hold display 30TM004) ends (the period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 10-7).

  As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the normal first hold display 30TM001 (white round display) corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. The first hold display in the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode) within the period. In addition, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, the presence / absence of execution of the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020, and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding secondary hold display 30TM004 and secondary active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  In addition, not only in such a form, when a new start winning occurs within the prohibited period of change effects, the normal mode secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first reserved memory number is 4 based on the start winning prize, the fourth first reserved display 30TM001 and the secondary reserved display area 30TM104 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (3), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 10-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side. At the same time, the subactive display 30TM005 displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105 is erased. The secondary hold display 30TM004 displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104 is shifted and displayed one by one on the secondary active display area 30TM105 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the normal first hold display 30TM001 displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 of the normal mode that was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. It will be.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 10-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (first hold display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (5), the decorative display variable display is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display region 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side, The secondary active display 30TM005 displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the secondary hold display (the normal secondary display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104 is 1 One by one on the side of the secondary active display area 30TM105 It was collected displayed in the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the special mode to the blue mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue round display), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-holding display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode (sub-holding display 30TM004b which is a blue star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (7), the decorative display variable display is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display region 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side, The secondary active display 30TM005 displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105 is erased, and the secondary hold display (normal secondary display 30TM004 (white star display) and blue display) displayed in the secondary hold display area 30TM104. Secondary hold display 30TM004b (blue star shape Shown)) shifts the display one by one sub active display area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-7), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue form to the red form (the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red round display in this example), and based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect, The sub-holding display to be notified is changed from the blue mode to the red mode (sub-holding display 30TM004c which is a red star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (9), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 10-7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001c (red round display) in red mode) displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub-active display area 30TM105 is displayed. The sub-active display 30TM005 displayed on the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is erased, and the sub-hold display (red-type sub-hold display 30TM004c (red star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is displayed in the sub-active display area 30TM105. In the image display device 5 with a shift display To start the display of the change.

  Then, after the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed), the CPU 120 for effect control is displayed. Within the period from T7 to T8 of 10-7, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103. The change pattern for changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 after the shift display will be described later with reference to FIGS. Further, when changing the display mode of the active display 30TM003, a change suggesting effect described later may be executed.

  If the secondary active display 30TM005 is not in the final display mode immediately after the shift display, the secondary active display 30TM005 is finally displayed in the secondary active display area 30TM105 within the period shown from T7 to T8 in FIG. 10-7. Change to aspect. For example, when the final display mode of the secondary active display 30TM005 determined at the time of winning the start is a red mode and the secondary active display 30TM005 is displayed in a blue mode immediately after the shift display, The sub active display 30TM005 is changed from the blue mode to the red mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 10-7), the same decorative design (“7” in this example) is stopped in the left design display area and the right design display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect is displayed in which the characters “reach !!” are displayed at the bottom of the screen, that is, in the area overlapping the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103. Here, since the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, it is prevented that the visibility of the reach effect is lowered and the interest is lowered. can do. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target ends (until the timing indicated by T9 in FIG. 10-7).

  As described above, as the reach effect is executed at the lower part of the screen, the first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 that share at least a part of the display area with the area where the reach effect is executed are not displayed. On the other hand, regarding the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display that are displayed in an area different from the area where the reach effect is executed, the period during which the reach effect is being executed can be continuously displayed at the top of the screen. The player can see them. Thereby, the player can easily grasp the number of reserved memories during the execution period of the reach effect, and can grasp the display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display.

(Specific example of executing only the first change effect)
Next, a specific example in the case where it is decided to execute only the first change effect at the time of starting winning will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-10 to 10-12. FIG. 10-10 is a time chart when only the first change effect is executed. FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12 are displayed on the image display device 5 when only the first change effect is executed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of an effect image.

  First, in FIG. 10-11 (1), the first middle storage number is 3 and the left and right decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 in a variable manner (T1 timing shown in FIG. 10-10). (Variation display) is being executed. At this time, a normal mode active display 30TM003 (white round display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and a normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white round display) is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed.

  Then, when the image display device 5 performs the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (2) (timing T2 shown in FIG. 10-10), a new prize is awarded. It is assumed that a start winning for the ball device 6A has occurred and the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute only the first change effect. As described above, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start prize that is the determination target (in this example, the gold mode) And the change pattern (this example change pattern 407) of the 1st change production is determined. Further, in this example, it is assumed that it is decided not to display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 (so that the second change effect is not executed). At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the remaining number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 based on the determination that the sub-hold display 30TM004 and the sub-active display 30TM005 are not displayed based on the determination at the time of starting winning. Also, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the change prohibition flag as shown in (T2) of FIG. 10-10 and FIG. 10-11 (2) based on the decision to execute the first change effect. Then, the execution of the first change effect and the second change effect for the start winning (first reserved memory) generated after this is prohibited. The execution prohibition period of the first change effect and the second change effect is from when the first hold display 30TM001 that is the target of the first change effect is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 30TM001 ends. This is a period (period from T2 to T9 shown in FIG. 10-10).

  As a result, when a new start prize is generated within the change effect prohibition period, the normal first hold display 30TM001 (white round display) corresponding to the start prize is displayed, and the change effect is prohibited. The first hold display in the normal mode does not change to another mode (for example, the special mode, the blue mode, or the red mode) within the period. In addition, based on the fact that the change prohibition flag is set, the presence / absence of execution of the second change effect and the final display mode are not determined (YES in step S30TM1020, and the process of step S30TM1030 is not executed). The corresponding secondary hold display 30TM004 and secondary active display 30TM005 are not displayed.

  In addition, not only in such a form, when a new start winning occurs within the prohibited period of change effects, the normal mode secondary hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start winning can be displayed, The display mode of the secondary hold display 30TM004 may not be changed.

  In this example, since the first reserved memory number is 4 based on the start winning prize, the fourth first reserved display 30TM001 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 is subject to the advance notice by the first change effect. This is a hold display corresponding to the variable display. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (3), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 10-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display 30TM001 displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the normal first hold display 30TM001 displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (4) (timing T3 shown in FIG. 10-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the normal mode to the special mode (in this example, the first hold display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (5), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) displayed in the hold display region 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side to display the image display device In step 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (6) (timing T4 shown in FIG. 10-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the special form to the blue form (first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (7), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) displayed in the hold display region 30TM101 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side to display the image display device In step 5, the next variable display is started.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (8) (timing T5 shown in FIG. 10-10), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect when starting the variable display. Then, the first hold display to be notified is changed from the blue form to the red form (first hold display 30TM001c which is a red round display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (9), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (10) (timing T6 shown in FIG. 10-10), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and first The first hold display displayed in the hold display area 30TM101 (the first hold display 30TM001c in red mode (red round display)) is shifted and displayed on the active display area 30TM103 side, and the image display device 5 performs the following changes. Start displaying.

  Then, after the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is executed (after the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the first change effect is displayed), the CPU 120 for effect control is displayed. Within the period indicated by T10 to T8 of 10-10, the active display 30TM003c in the red mode is changed to the final display mode (gold in this example) in the active display region 30TM103.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (11) (timing shown at T8 in FIG. 10-10), the same decorative design (“7” in this example) is stopped in the left design display area and the right design display area. The reach state is established, and the reach effect is displayed in which the characters “reach !!” are displayed in the lower part of the screen, that is, in the area where the first hold display area 30TM101 and the active display area 30TM103 overlap. Here, at the timing when the reach state is established, the first hold display 30TM001, the second hold display 30TM002, and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed. The first hold display 30TM001 and the active display 30TM003 are not displayed until the change display of the notice target is completed (until the timing indicated by T9 in FIG. 10-10).

  As described above, when it is determined that only the first change effect is to be performed at the time of the start winning prize, the period until the variable display that is the target of the first change effect ends is a new start prize. The first change effect based on is not executed, and the second change effect based on a new start prize is not executed. Thus, after changing the display mode of the first hold display 30TM001 in the first hold display area 30TM101 with high visibility (after changing to a mode different from the normal mode), a new start prize is subsequently generated. Even in this case, by not performing the second change effect based on the new start prize in the sub-holding display area 30TM104 with low visibility, the player is made to pay attention to the first change effect with high visibility. Complicated effects due to the execution of the second change effect for the variable display that is different from the variable display that is the target of the one change effect is prevented.

  In the present embodiment, if a new start prize occurs after the first change effect is executed (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although the example which prohibits execution of the 1st change effect and 2nd change effect corresponding to a start winning prize was shown, not only in such a form but after execution of the 1st change effect (the 1st hold display 30TM001 is a normal mode. If a new start prize is generated during a period displayed in a different manner, the first change effect and the second change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but at that time The execution ratio of the first change effect and the second change effect may be lowered than before the first change effect is executed (the period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in the normal mode).

  In addition, when a new start winning occurs after the execution of the first change effect (period in which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), not only the second change effect but also other notices You may make it restrict | limit execution of production. For example, the number of remaining fluctuation displays until the fluctuation display based on the new start winning is executed is displayed on the image display device 5 every time the fluctuation display is executed (for example, the first reserved storage number is changed from 3 to 0). (With “1” subtraction, “3”, “2”, “1”, “0” are displayed) The countdown effect may not be executed. Further, the background change effect for changing the background image to the special mode may not be executed until the variable display based on the new start winning is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new start prize is generated after execution of the first change effect (a period during which the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode), the new start prize is generated. Although the example which prohibits execution of both the 1st change effect and 2nd change effect corresponding to a start winning prize was shown, not only in this form but after execution of a 1st change effect (1st hold display 30TM001 is normal. When a new start prize is generated during a period displayed in a mode different from the mode), the first change effect corresponding to the new start prize can be executed, but the new start prize is supported. The second change effect is not executed (the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start prize is not displayed, or the sub-hold display 30TM004 corresponding to the new start prize is displayed. As the display mode remains unchanged at the normal mode) as may be.

(Modification regarding first change effect and second change effect)
In the above embodiment, the aspect is changed at the timing when the first hold display 30TM001 is shifted in the first change effect, and the aspect is changed at the timing when the sub hold display 30TM004 is shifted in the second change effect. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the mode of the first hold display 30TM001 is changed according to the execution of the first hold action effect acting on the first hold display 30TM001, and the second hold display 30TM004 is acted on. The mode of the sub-hold display 30TM004 may be changed according to the execution of the sub-hold action effect.

  10-13, FIG. 10-14, and FIG. 10-15 are specific examples in the case where the first holding action effect is executed in the first change effect and the sub-holding action effect is executed in the second change effect.

  First, FIG. 10-13 (1) shows a state in which the display display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is executed on the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved storage number is 3. At this time, a normal mode active display 30TM003 (white round display) is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and a normal mode first hold display 30TM001 (white round display) is displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. ) Is displayed. At this time, the secondary hold display 30TM004 is not displayed, and the secondary active display 30TM005 is not displayed. Further, a guide (square frame) indicating the sub-active display area 30TM105 is not displayed.

  Then, when the image display device 5 performs the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (2), a new start winning to the winning ball device 6A occurs, It is assumed that the effect control CPU 120 has decided to execute both the first change effect and the second change effect. As described above, when the CPU 120 for effect control determines to execute the first change effect, the final display mode of the active display 30TM003 corresponding to the start prize that is the determination target (in this example, the gold mode) When the change pattern of the first change effect (change pattern 407 in this example) is determined and the second change effect is determined to be executed, the sub-active display corresponding to the start winning that is the determination target The final display mode of 30TM005 (red mode in this example) and the change pattern of the second change effect (change pattern 906 in this example) are determined. At this time, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, 4 is set as the value of the prefetch counter. That is, the value of the prefetch counter indicates the remaining number of variable displays until the variable display that is the target of the prefetch notice effect is executed.

  In addition, based on the decision to execute the second change effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the normal active secondary active display 30TM005 (white star display) in the secondary active display area 30TM105, and the secondary active display 30TM105. A guide (square frame) indicating the active display area 30TM105 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the first reserved storage number is 4, four sub-hold displays 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode are displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104.

  In this example, since the first reserved memory number is 4 based on the start winning prize, the fourth first reserved display 30TM001 and the secondary reserved display area 30TM104 displayed in the first reserved display area 30TM101 are displayed. The displayed fourth sub-hold display 30TM004 is a hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified by the first change effect and the second change effect. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (3), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (4), the production control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and also displays the first display in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display 30TM001 is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display area 30TM103 side. At the same time, the subactive display 30TM005 displayed in the subactive display area 30TM105 is erased and displayed in the subhold display area 30TM104. The sub-hold display 30TM004 is shifted and displayed one by one on the side of the sub-active display area 30TM105, and the next variable display is started on the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the normal first hold display 30TM001 displayed as the first hold display at the position closest to the active display area 30TM103 is shifted to the active display area 30TM103 and displayed as the active display 30TM003. Become. Further, in this shift display, the sub-hold display 30TM004 of the normal mode that was displayed as the sub-hold display at the position closest to the sub-active display area 30TM105 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 and displayed as the sub-active display 30TM005. It will be.

  Here, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the normal mode to the special mode (during the execution of the variable display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001a) which is a white triangle display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect and determines the type of the first holding action effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the first holding action effect (action effect A) in which the character A appears.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect (action effect A) based on the determination result. In the example shown in FIG. 10-13 (4), the character A appears and an effect is performed in which the ball is thrown toward the first hold display 30TM001 to be notified. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character A hits the target first hold display 30TM001, the player can expect the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001 to change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (5), the effect control CPU 120 displays the first hold display of the notice target from the normal mode according to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect A). The mode (first hold display 30TM001a which is a white triangle display in this example) is changed. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (7), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and also displays the first display displayed in the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001a in the special mode) is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub display displayed in the sub active display region 30TM105 is displayed. The active display 30TM005 is erased, and the sub-hold display (normal-type sub-hold display 30TM004 (white star display)) displayed in the sub-hold display area 30TM104 is shifted to the sub-active display area 30TM105 side by one. In the image display device 5 To start the next variable display.

  Here, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the special mode to the blue mode (during the execution of the variable display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect. In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b) which is a blue round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect and determines the type of the first holding action effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the first holding action effect (action effect B) in which the character B appears.

  Further, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-holding display to be notified from the normal mode to the blue mode (this example) during execution of the variable display based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect. Then, it is recognized that the sub-hold display 30TM004b), which is a blue star display, is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-hold action effect and the type of sub-hold action effect (character type) to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that the sub-holding action effect (action effect a) in which the character a appears is decided to be executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first hold action effect (action effect B) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 10-13 (7), the character B appears, and the effect of throwing the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001a to be notified is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character B hits the first hold display 30TM001a to be notified, the player can expect the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001a to change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (8), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the special mode to the blue color according to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect B). The mode is changed to the first hold display 30TM001b which is a blue round display in this example.

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-hold action effect (action effect a) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 10-14 (9), the character a appears, and the effect of flying the balloon toward the sub-holding display 30TM004 to be notified is executed. As shown in FIG. 10-14 (10) and FIG. 10-15 (11), the balloon that the character a flew flies toward the sub-holding display 30TM004 to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-holding display 30TM004. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the aspect of the secondary hold display 30TM004.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (11) and (12), when a balloon arrives at the position of the secondary hold display 30TM004 to be notified, the form of the secondary hold display 30TM004 is balloon-shaped (second hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image (sub-holding display 30TM004G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-14 (13) and (14), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-holding display to be notified in the normal mode in response to the execution of the sub-holding action effect (action effect a). To a blue mode (sub-holding display 30TM004b which is a blue star display in this example). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (15), the variable display of decorative symbols is ended in the image display device 5.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (16), the effect control CPU 120 erases the active display 30TM003 displayed in the active display area 30TM103 and also displays the first hold display area 30TM101. The hold display (the first hold display 30TM001 in the normal mode and the first hold display 30TM001b in the blue mode) is shifted and displayed one by one on the active display region 30TM103 side, and at the same time, the sub display displayed in the sub active display region 30TM105 is displayed. The active display 30TM005 is erased, and the subpending display (the subpending display 30TM004 (white star display) in the normal mode) and the subpending display 30TM004b (blue star display in the blue mode) displayed in the subpending display area 30TM104 )) One by one secondary active table Shifted displayed in the area 30TM105 side, the image display device 5 starts displaying the following variations.

  Here, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the blue mode to the red mode (during the execution of the variable display based on the change pattern 407 of the first change effect). In this example, it is recognized that the display is changed to the first hold display 30TM001c) which is a red round display. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first holding action effect and determines the type of the first holding action effect to be executed (character type). In this example, it is assumed that the first holding action effect (action effect C) in which the character C appears is decided to be executed.

  In addition, when starting the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 changes the sub-holding display subject to notice during the execution of the variable display from the blue color to the red color (this example) based on the change pattern 906 of the second change effect. Then, it is recognized that the sub-hold display 30TM004c), which is a red star display, is changed. Along with this, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the sub-hold action effect and the type of sub-hold action effect (character type) to be executed. In this example, it is assumed that the sub-holding action effect (action effect b) in which the character b appears is decided to be executed.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes the first holding action effect (action effect C) based on these determination results. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15 (17), the character C appears, and the effect of throwing the ball toward the first hold display 30TM001b to be notified is executed. By displaying an image in which the ball thrown by the character C hits the first hold display 30TM001b to be notified, the player can expect the aspect of the first hold display 30TM001b to change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (18), the effect control CPU 120 changes the first hold display to be notified from the blue mode to the red color in response to the execution of the first hold action effect (action effect C). The mode is changed to the first hold display 30TM001c which is a red round display in this example.

  The effect control CPU 120 next executes the sub-hold action effect (action effect b) within the same variable display period. In the example shown in FIG. 10-15 (19), the character b appears, and the effect of flying the balloon toward the sub-holding display 30TM004b to be notified is executed. As shown in FIGS. 10-15 (20) and 10-15 (21), the balloon blew by the character b flies toward the sub-holding display 30TM004b to be notified and reaches the position of the sub-holding display 30TM004b. By displaying the image to be displayed, the player can be expected to change the aspect of the secondary hold display 30TM004b.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (21) and (22), when a balloon reaches the position of the secondary hold display 30TM004b to be notified, the form of the secondary hold display 30TM004b is balloon-shaped (second hold display 30TM004F). ). Subsequently, an image (sub-holding display 30TM004G) in which the balloon is broken is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-15 (23) and (24), the effect control CPU 120 displays the sub-holding display subject to notice in a blue mode in response to the execution of the sub-holding action effect (action effect b). To a red color (sub-holding display 30TM004c which is a red star display in this example). .

  In this way, the production mode is different between the first holding action effect executed when the mode of the first hold display is changed and the sub-holding action effect executed when the mode of the sub-hold display is changed. Thus, it is possible to further enhance the interest by the presence of a plurality of types of hold correspondence display (first hold display and sub hold display).

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 to 10-15, the effect that the character appears and performs an action on the icon may be executed when the display mode of the active display is changed, Further, it may be executed when the display mode of the sub-active display is changed. For example, when the active display 30TM003 is displayed in the normal mode, the display of the active display 30TM003 is performed in response to the execution of the active action effect in which the character A appears and throws the ball toward the active display 30TM003. The mode may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (special mode, blue mode, green mode, red mode, gold mode). Further, when the sub-active display 30TM005 is displayed in the normal mode, the sub-active action effect that performs the action of flying the balloon toward the sub-active display 30TM005 when the character a appears is executed. The display mode of the display 30TM005 may be changed from the normal mode to another mode (blue mode, red mode). As described above, the active action effect executed when changing the aspect of the active display and the sub-active action effect executed when changing the aspect of the sub-active display are different from each other in the effect form. It is possible to further enhance the interest by the presence of the fluctuation corresponding display (active display and sub-active display).

  In said embodiment, according to the present setting value (1-6) regarding the pachinko machine 1, you may make it the execution rate of a 1st change effect, and the execution rate of a 2nd change effect differ. For example, compared with the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the ratio where the first hold display 30TM001 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is higher when the set value is high (4 to 6). In addition, the ratio at which the secondary hold display 30TM004 is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode (or the ratio at which the secondary hold display 30TM004 and the secondary active display 30TM005 itself are displayed) may be high. In addition, when the set value is high (4 to 6) compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the number of changes in the display color of the first hold display 30TM001 is larger (for example, 3 times). ) A change pattern may be selected at a high rate, and a change rate at which a change pattern of the display color of the secondary hold display 30TM004 is large (for example, 2 times) may be selected at a high rate.

(Active change effect and change suggestion effect)
In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the active display when the start winning is generated. However, as described above, the display mode of the active display during the active shift is the final display mode. If they are different, an active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display is executed.

  Here, when the display mode of the active display is changed (when the active change effect is executed), and when the display mode of the active display is not changed (when the active change effect is not executed), the display mode of the active display is changed. A change suggestion effect suggesting that there is a possibility of change can be executed. In this change suggestion effect, there are a success mode and a failure mode. In the example shown below, when the change mode suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is changed to change the failure mode. When the suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the active display is not changed.

  When performing an active shift accompanying the start of variable display, the effect control CPU 120 has a different display mode of active display at the time of active shift and a final display mode of active display determined when a start winning is generated. In this case, by executing the active change effect and the change suggestion effect during the execution of the variable display, the active display is changed from the display mode at the time of active shift to the final display mode within the variable display period.

  In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines a change pattern for changing the active display from the display mode at the time of the active shift to the final display mode when the variable display is started. FIGS. 10-16 is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the table for determining the change pattern of active display. In this embodiment, determination values are assigned to the special mode, the blue mode, the green mode, the red mode, and the gold mode as the final display mode of the active display. In addition, the display of “◯” in FIGS. 10-16 indicates that the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, and the display of “?” Indicates that the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed. ing.

  When the active display during the active shift is in the normal mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal mode active display change pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 10-16 (A). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (A), in the active display change pattern determination table for the normal mode, when the final display mode is a special mode, the change pattern 011 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment value is assigned. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 011 is 2 times, of which the success mode is 1 and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 011, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the active mode is changed to the special mode by executing the change mode suggestion effect of the success mode, and then the change mode of the failure mode is executed and executed. It is a change pattern which does not change a display with a special mode.

  When the final display mode is a blue mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 012 is selected with a probability of 60% and the change pattern 013 is selected with a probability of 40%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 012 and the change pattern 013 is 3 times, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 012, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the active mode is changed to the special mode by executing the change mode of the successful mode, and then the change mode of the successful mode is executed and the active mode is executed. The change pattern 013 is a change pattern in which the active display is not changed in the blue mode by changing the display to the blue mode and then executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, and the change pattern 013 displays the active display in the normal mode during the active shift. After that, the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the failure mode change indication effect is executed to keep the active display in the special mode, and then the success mode change. It is a change pattern in which the suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a blue mode.

  When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 014 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 015 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 014 and the change pattern 015 is 4 times, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 014, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the active mode is changed to the special mode by executing the change mode of the successful mode, and then the change mode of the successful mode is executed and executed. Change the display to the blue color, then execute the change suggestion effect of the successful mode to change the active display to the green color, and then execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display in the green color The change pattern 015 is the change pattern 015, in which the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, and then the change mode of the successful mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change mode of the successful mode is suggested. To change the active display to blue, and then execute the change suggestion effect of failure The active display without change from blue aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display in green mode.

  When the final display mode is a red mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 016 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 017 with a probability of 20%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 016 and the change pattern 017 is 5 times, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 016, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to execute the active mode. Change the display to the blue aspect, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success aspect to change the active display to the green aspect, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success aspect to change the active display to the red aspect, After that, the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed to change the active display in the red mode, and the change pattern 017 displays the active display in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, and then the change suggestion effect of the success mode. To change the active display to a special mode, and then execute a change mode suggestion for the successful mode The active display is changed to the green mode by changing the active display to the blue mode, and then the active mode is changed to the green mode. It is a change pattern that changes the active display to the red mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the successful mode after that.

  In addition, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 018 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 018 is 5 times, of which the success mode is 5 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 018, after the active display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the active shift, the change indication effect of the successful mode is executed to change the active display to the special mode, and then the change indication effect of the successful mode is executed and activated. Change the display to the blue aspect, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success aspect to change the active display to the green aspect, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success aspect to change the active display to the red aspect, It is a change pattern that changes the active display to the golden mode by executing the change suggestion effect of the successful mode after that.

  When the active display at the time of active shift is in a special mode, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the special mode as shown in FIG. 10-16 (B). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (B), in the active display change pattern determination table for the special mode, when the final display mode is the blue mode, the change pattern 021 is selected with a probability of 100%. Judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 021 is executed twice, of which the success mode is 1 and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 021, after the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of the active shift, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed to activate It is a change pattern which does not change a display with a blue mode.

  When the final display mode is the green mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 022 is selected with a probability of 70% and the change pattern 023 is selected with a probability of 30%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 022 and the change pattern 023 is 3 times, of which the success mode is 2 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 022, after the active display is displayed in a special mode at the time of active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed and activated. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a green mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed in the green mode. The change pattern 023 displays the active display in a special mode at the time of active shift. After that, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the blue mode, and then the change of the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern in which the suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a green mode.

  When the final display mode is a red mode, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 024 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 025 is selected with a probability of 20%. In the change pattern 024 and the change pattern 025, the change suggestion effect is executed four times, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 024, the active display is displayed in a special manner at the time of active shift, and then the success indication change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a blue appearance, and then the success indication change indication effect is executed to execute the active indication. Change the display to the green mode, then execute the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the red mode, and then execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode to keep the active display unchanged in the red mode The change pattern 025 displays the active display in a special manner at the time of the active shift, then executes the change suggestion effect of the success mode to change the active display to the blue mode, and then changes the suggestion of the success mode. To change the active display to green, and then execute the change suggestion effect of failure Without changing the active display stays green aspect, the change pattern running changes suggested effect of subsequent success embodiment changes the active display red manner.

  In addition, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 026 is selected with a probability of 100%. The number of executions of the change suggestion effect in the change pattern 026 is four times, of which the success mode is 4 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 026, after the active display is displayed in a special manner at the time of the active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the blue mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to execute the change. Change the display to the green mode, then change the active display to the golden mode by executing the change mode of the successful mode and the active mode to the red mode It is a pattern.

  When the active display at the time of active shift is in a blue color, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the blue color as shown in FIG. 10-16 (C). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (C), in the active display change pattern determination table for the blue mode, the change pattern 031 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the green mode. Judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 031 is executed twice, of which the success mode is 1 and the failure mode is 1 time. In the change pattern 031, after the active display is displayed in a blue mode at the time of the active shift, the active mode is changed to the green mode by executing the change mode indicating the success mode, and then the change mode indicating effect of the failure mode is executed. It is a change pattern which does not change a display with a green mode.

  When the final display mode is a red mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 032 is selected with a probability of 80% and the change pattern 033 is selected with a probability of 20%. In the change pattern 032 and the change pattern 033, the number of executions of the change suggestion effect is three times, of which the success mode is two times and the failure mode is one time. In the change pattern 032, the active display is displayed in a blue mode at the time of the active shift, and then the success mode change suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a green mode, and then the success mode change indication effect is executed to execute the active mode. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a red mode, and then the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the active display is not changed in the red mode. The change pattern 033 displays the active display in a blue mode during active shift. Thereafter, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change indication effect of the failure mode is executed to keep the active display in the green mode, and then the change of the success mode is changed. It is a change pattern in which the suggestion effect is executed to change the active display to a red mode.

  In addition, when the final display mode is the gold mode, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 034 is selected with a probability of 100%. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 034 is executed three times, of which the success mode is 3 times and the failure mode is 0 times. In the change pattern 034, after the active display is displayed in a blue mode at the time of active shift, the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to change the active display to the green mode, and then the change indication effect of the success mode is executed to execute the active mode. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to a red color and the active display is changed to a gold color by executing a change suggestion effect of a successful mode.

  When the active display at the time of active shift is in a red color, the effect control CPU 120 selects an active display change pattern determination table for the red color as shown in FIG. 10-16 (D). As shown in FIG. 10-16 (D), in the active display change pattern determination table for the red mode, the change pattern 041 is selected with a probability of 100% when the final display mode is the gold mode. Judgment value is assigned. The change suggestion effect in the change pattern 041 is executed once, of which the success mode is 1 and the failure mode is 0. The change pattern 041 is a change pattern in which an active display is displayed in a red color during an active shift, and then a change suggestion effect in a successful mode is executed to change the active display to a gold color.

  As shown in FIG. 10-16, within one fluctuation display period (in this example, since the display mode of the active display changes to the final display mode before the reach state is established, the reach display is started after the fluctuation display is started. In the period until the state is established), the more the change suggestion effect is executed, in particular, the more the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the more the display color is changed to a high expectation degree The ratio is high.

  Here, in the present embodiment, at the stage where the n-th change suggestion effect is executed, the higher the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode so far, the higher the ratio at which the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is executed. It is configured as follows. For example, in the stage where the second change suggestion effect is executed (in the case of n = 2), the third change suggestion effect is always executed when both are successful. If one of the two times is a success mode and one is a failure mode, the third change suggestion effect may not be executed. The same applies when n = 3 and n = 4. As described above, when the change suggestion effect is executed, the more the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the successful mode executed within the period from the start of the change display until the reach state is established, the more the same change occurs. Since the rate at which the next change suggestion effect is executed within the display period (within the period from when the variable display is started to when the reach state is established) is high, the player can perform the change suggestion effect execution number, particularly the success mode. Attention will be paid to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect, thereby improving the interest.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the larger the ratio of [the number of times the change suggestion effect of the success mode has been executed] to [the number of times the change suggestion effect has been executed] within the one variable display period, the higher the jackpot expectation. The rate of change to a higher display mode is higher. Specifically, [the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode / the number of executions of the change display effect] is 1/2 when the final display mode is a special mode, and the final display mode is a blue mode. 2/3 in the case, 3/4 when the final display mode is the green mode, 4/5 when the final display mode is the red mode, and the final display mode is the gold mode. In this case, it is 5/5. As described above, the larger the [number of executions of success suggestion effect / the number of executions of change suggestion effect] is, the higher the ratio that the active display changes to the display mode with a high expectation degree of big hits. Will also pay attention to the relationship between the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode, thereby improving the interest.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the ratio which changes to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation degree is so high that the frequency | count that a change suggestion effect of a success mode is performed continuously increases. Specifically, the number of success mode change suggestion effects is 1 (not continuous) or 2 when the final display mode is blue, and when the final display mode is green. 2 or 3, 3 or 4 when the final display mode is a red mode, and 5 when the final display mode is a gold mode. Thereby, the player is interested in whether or not the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed and how many times it is continuously executed.

  Further, in this example, when the final display mode is the same display color, a change pattern with a larger number of success mode change suggestive effects is easily selected. For example, in the case of the blue color, the change pattern 012 (2 continuous) is selected more than the change pattern 013 (not continuous). In the green color, the change pattern is higher than the change pattern 015 (2 continuous). 014 (3 continuous) is selected at a higher rate, and in the case of a red color, the change pattern 016 (4 continuous) is selected at a higher rate than the change pattern 017 (3 continuous). Thus, even when the same display color is finally obtained, the player's expectation can be further enhanced by making the change suggestion effect of the success mode easy to continue.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines the number of executions of the change suggestion effect and the change suggestion effect mode (success mode or failure mode) based on the change pattern shown in FIG. Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of change suggestion effect based on whether the change suggestion effect is a success mode or a failure mode and whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed. decide. As the type of change suggestion effect, change suggestion effect A in which character A appears, change suggestion effect B in which character B appears, change suggestion effect C in which character C appears, change suggestion effect D in which character D appears, and character There is a change suggestion effect E in which E appears.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a successful mode and the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning prize, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Select the table of “Success mode, next performance execution”. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, next effect is executed], character A is 10%, character B is 20%, character C is 30%, character D is 40%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a successful mode and the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is not executed in the change pattern determined at the time of winning the start, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Select the table of “Success mode, no next execution”. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [success mode, no next effect execution], character A is 5%, character B is 15%, character C is 30%, character D is 45%, and character E is 5%. Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a failure mode and the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning prize, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Select the table of “Failure mode, next execution”. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, next effect is executed], character A is 37%, character B is 32%, character C is 30%, character D is 1%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  When the change suggestion effect executed at the nth time is a failure mode and the (n + 1) th change suggestion effect is not executed in the change pattern determined at the start winning prize, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. Select the table of failure mode, no next performance execution. When the change suggestion effect determination table is [failure mode, no next effect execution], character A is 35%, character B is 30%, character C is 30%, character D is 5%, and character E is 0%. Judgment values are assigned to be selected by probability.

  For each change suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 determines the type of the change suggestion effect based on the change suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. Therefore, when the nth and n + 1th change suggestion effects are executed, for example, the character A is selected in the nth change suggestion effect, and all the characters A to E in the n + 1th change suggestion effects are selected. May be selected. That is, when the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears at the nth time is executed, the change suggestion effect B in which the character B different from the character A appears at the n + 1th time may be executed, while the n + 1 There is a possibility that a change suggestion effect A in which the same character A appears in the nth time is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify change suggestion effects.

  As shown in FIG. 10-17, the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears has a low probability of becoming a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is high, and the change suggestion effect in which the character D appears. D has a high probability of becoming a success mode, but has a low probability of executing the next change suggestion effect. Further, the change suggestion effect E in which the character E appears has a probability of 100% as a success mode, but the probability that the next change suggestion effect is executed is 0%. Therefore, for the player, when the character A is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is low, but the expectation that the next change suggesting effect will be executed is high. When the character D is displayed on the screen, the expectation that the display mode of the active display will change is high, but the expectation that the next change suggesting effect will be executed is low, and the character E is displayed on the screen. In this case, the display mode of the active display always changes, but the next change suggestion effect is not executed (the current change suggestion effect is the last).

  In this way, since the rate of change of the display mode of active display to a mode with a high expectation degree of jackpots varies depending on the type of character appearing in the production, the player pays attention to which type of character appears Will do. Further, since the rate at which the next change suggesting effect is executed differs depending on the type of character appearing in the effect, the player pays attention to which type of character appears.

  In addition, the production type is not limited to the production type shown in FIG. 10-17. For example, an production type may be provided in which the rate of change of the display mode of the active display is low and the rate of execution of the next change suggesting production is low. An effect type with a high rate of change of the display mode of display and a high rate of execution of the next change suggesting effect may be provided.

(Specific examples of active change effects and change suggestion effects)
Next, specific examples of the active change effect and the change suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-18 to 10-20. 10-18, FIGS. 10-19 (9) to (12), and the example of effects shown in FIG. 10-20, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode is set to the golden mode at the start winning prize. In addition, when the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and the variable display based on the start winning is started, the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the change pattern 018. . 10-18 and FIGS. 10-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the production examples shown in FIG. Example of determining that the mode at the time of active shift is to be the normal mode and determining that the change pattern of the active display is the change pattern 014 when starting the variable display based on the start winning It is.

  In this example, based on the change pattern 018, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears with respect to the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears for the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is determined to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on what is performed, and it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect C in which the character C appears for the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the character D. The change suggestion effect D is determined to be executed, and the change suggestion effect D of the success mode is determined to be executed based on the execution of the fifth change suggestion effect. It is assumed that it is determined to execute the change suggestion effect E of the success mode in which the character E appears with respect to the effect.

  In FIG. 10-18 (1), the active display 30TM003 (white circle display) in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103, and the left, right and right decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5 in a variable manner. It shows the state.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect A of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the first change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (1), the character A appears from the right side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character A performs the action of throwing the ball toward the active display 30TM003 is displayed, and then FIG. As shown in -18 (2), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character A has hit the active display 30TM003 is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003 in the normal mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the explosion of the active display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (3), in response to the end of the first change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays a special active display 30TM003a (white triangle display). .

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect B of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the second change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (4), the character B appears from the left side of the screen, and the effect image in which the character B performs the action of throwing the ball toward the active display 30TM003a is displayed. As shown in -18 (5), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character B has hit the active display 30TM003a is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003a in the special mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (6), in response to the end of the second change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays an active display 30TM003b (blue circle display) in a blue mode. The

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect C of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the third change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-18 (7), a character C appears from the right side of the screen, and an effect image in which the character C performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003b is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10-18 (8), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character C has hit the active display 30TM003b is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the blue-colored active display 30TM003b is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (9), in response to the end of the third change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays a green-type active display 30TM003d (green round display). The

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect D of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image is displayed in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 10-19 (11), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D hits the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (12), in response to the end of the fourth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays the red active display 30TM003c (red round display). The

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect E of the success mode in response to the execution timing of the fifth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (13), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in which cracks are formed on the transparent member (glass plate or the like) constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. . Further, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (14), a crack image (screen crack image 30TM200) in an aspect in which the crack range is enlarged is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (15), an image (screen split image 30TM210) in a mode in which the transparent member constituting the screen of the image display device 5 is broken is displayed, and the character E appears from the center of the screen. An effect image in which the character E performs an action of throwing the ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003c is displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (16), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character E has hit the active display 30TM003c is displayed. At this time, an effect image (active display 30TM003G) different from the red-colored active display 30TM003c is displayed in the active display area 30TM103. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (17), in response to the end of the fifth change suggestion effect, the active display area 30TM103 displays an active display 30TM003e (golden round display) in a golden manner. The

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (18), the screen split image 30TM210 displayed on the image display device 5 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (19), the left symbol display area and the right symbol are displayed. The reach state where the same decorative design (in this example, “7”) is stopped is established in the display area, and the reach “Leach!” Is displayed at the bottom of the screen (the area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). Production is performed. Here, as described above, at the timing when reach is established, the gold-colored active display 30TM003e is not displayed, and the square frame indicating the active display region 30TM103 is also not displayed. The information that has not been displayed is not displayed until the variable display of the notice subject is completed.

  10-18 and FIGS. 10-19 (9), (10), (20) to (22), the production control CPU 120 determines the final display mode to be the green mode at the start winning prize. In addition, when the active shift mode is determined to be the normal mode, and the variable display based on the start winning is started, the active display change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 014. .

  In this example, based on the change pattern 014, it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A in which the character A appears with respect to the first change suggestion effect, and the second change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect A of the success mode, and it is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B in which the character B appears in relation to the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is executed. It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect B of the success mode based on the fact that the character C appears in relation to the third change suggestion effect, and the fourth time It is decided to execute the change suggestion effect C of the success mode based on the execution of the change suggestion effect of the character D. Changes suggested effect decided to run a D, and it is assumed that the fifth variation suggest effect is decided to execute the changes suggested effect D failure mode based on the not executed for.

  The production examples (first change suggestion presentation to third change suggestion presentation) shown in FIGS. 10-18 (1) to 10-19 (9) are the same as the presentation examples of the change pattern 018 described above. Is described, and examples of effects shown in FIGS. 10-19 (10) and (20) to (22) will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the failure suggestion change suggestion effect D in response to the execution timing of the fourth change suggestion effect. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (10), a character D appears from the left side of the screen, and an effect image is displayed in which the character D performs an action of throwing a ball while flying toward the active display 30TM003d. As shown in FIG. 10-19 (20), an effect image indicating that the ball thrown by the character D has not hit the active display 30TM003d is displayed. At this time, the active display area 30TM103 is continuously displayed with the active display 30TM003d in the green mode, and the above-described effect image (active display 30TM003G) is not displayed. An effect image in which the ball rolls toward the lower right of the screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 10-19 (21), when the fourth change suggestion effect is finished, the active display 30TM003d in the green mode is continuously displayed in the active display area 30TM103. That is, the display mode of the active display does not change before the execution of the fourth change suggestion effect (after the end of the third change suggestion effect).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 10-19 (22), the reach state in which the same decorative symbol (in this example, “4”) is stopped is established in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area. The reach effect is displayed in which the characters "" are displayed at the bottom of the screen (an area overlapping the active display area 30TM103). Here, as described above, since the active display area 30TM103 is not displayed at the timing when the reach state is established, the green-colored active display 30TM003d is not displayed until the fluctuating display of the notice target ends.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-18 (1) to 10-20 (19), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute the variable display of the left middle right decorative design in the image display device 5. The change suggestion effect is executed a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times) according to the change pattern. Then, when the execution of the change suggestion effect for a predetermined number of times is completed, the same decorative design is stopped in the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area, and the reach state is established. In other words, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the change suggestion effect a predetermined number of times, the image display device 5 temporarily stops the left, middle and right decorative symbols, changes the direction of the variable display, and changes the reach state. Do not establish. According to such a configuration, during the period when the change suggestion effect of a predetermined number of times according to the change pattern is executed, the variation display mode of the decorative symbol does not change, so that the change suggestion effect can be paid more attention.

  In addition, although FIG. 10-16 shows the change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode does not continue, the change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode continues may be provided without being limited to such a form. . Further, a change pattern in which the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed more than the change suggestion effect of the success mode may be provided. For example, after a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed three times in succession, a change pattern in which a success mode change indication effect is executed twice may be provided. Moreover, although the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed at least once, an effect pattern that does not change the display mode of the active display by not executing the change suggestion effect of the success mode once may be provided.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 10-16 and the like, the display mode of the active display does not change when the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, and the active display always changes when the success mode change indication effect is executed. Although an example in which the display mode changes has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such a form, and when a successful mode change suggestion effect is executed, it is active at a higher rate than when a failure mode change suggestion effect is executed. Any configuration that changes the display mode of the display may be used. For example, an effect pattern that does not change the display mode of the active display may be provided even if the change mode suggestion effect of the successful mode is executed. Even if the suggestion effect is executed, an effect pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes may be provided.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 10-16 and the like, when the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the active display is a display mode with a high degree of jackpot expectation (from the normal mode to the special mode, from the special mode) In this example, the blue mode, the blue mode is changed to the green mode, the green mode is changed to the red mode, and the red mode is changed to the golden mode). May be provided with a change pattern in which the display mode of the active display changes from the normal mode to the green mode, from the blue mode to the gold mode, etc., in which the expected degree of jackpot is higher by two or more stages. Further, the rate of change of the display mode in two or more stages may be different depending on the type of change suggestion effect to be executed (for example, the type of character that appears). When the display mode is executed, the rate of change of the display mode is two or more levels is low. When the change suggestion effect in which the character B appears is executed, the rate of change of the display mode is set to two or more levels. Also good. Further, when a change suggestion effect in which the character C appears is executed, the display mode may be changed in three stages.

  In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effect may be executed at a timing before the decorative symbol temporarily stops. Specifically, when the decorative symbol display is performed based on a variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation to be re-varied after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is executed one or more times, before the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. You may make it perform the change suggestion effect of a success mode. For example, when n temporary stops are executed, the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed before each temporary stop (the change suggestion effect of the success mode is continuously executed n times), and thereafter By executing the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, it may be suggested that the n + 1-th temporary stop is not executed. An effect pattern in which only the change suggestion effect of the failure mode is executed and the change suggestion effect of the success mode is not executed when the change display of the decorative pattern is executed based on the change pattern in which the pseudo continuous change is not executed even once. May be provided. Further, when the decorative symbol variation display is executed based on the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous variation is performed for a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, n + 1 times), the change suggestion effect of the success mode of n + 1 times is continuously performed. An effect pattern that is executed and does not execute the change suggestion effect of the failure mode may be provided.

  In such a configuration, the change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative design is not temporarily stopped (a character appears), and the change suggestion effect is ended before the decorative design is temporarily stopped (character It is preferable to perform an action to change the display mode of the active display. For example, immediately after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, the character A appears and performs an action to change the display mode of the active display from the normal mode to the special mode, and then the first temporary stop is performed. After the re-variation starts, the character B appears and takes action to change the display mode of the active display from the special mode to the blue mode. Thereafter, the second temporary stop is performed and the second re-variation occurs. After the start, the character C may appear and perform an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the green mode. In this way, it is possible to focus attention on the change suggestion effect by ensuring that the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol (that is, the period during which the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is changed) do not overlap. In addition, it is possible to prevent the effect of rendering when the decorative design temporarily stops.

  In addition, when executing the effect of changing the decorative display variation display direction from the vertical direction to the horizontal direction, the change suggestion effect is started in a state where the decorative design is displayed in the vertical direction (a character appears). It is preferable to end the change suggestion effect (change the display mode of the active display by performing the action of the character) before changing the decorative symbol change display direction to the horizontal direction. For example, the first character appears and actions are performed immediately after the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started, and the display mode of the active display is changed from the normal mode to the blue mode, and then the variable display direction of the decorative pattern is changed from the vertical direction. After changing in the horizontal direction, the next character may appear and perform an action so that the display mode of the active display changes from the blue mode to the red mode. In this way, by not overlapping the execution period of one change suggestion effect and the timing at which the change display direction of the decorative pattern changes, it is possible to focus attention on the change suggestion effect and to display the decorative pattern change display. It is possible to prevent the production effect when the direction changes from being lowered.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the change suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the display mode of the active display changes is shown, but the change suggestion effect is not limited to such a form, It may be an effect suggesting that changes. For example, the change pattern shown in FIG. 10-16 may be a change pattern when the display mode of the hold display is changed. When the change suggestion effect of the success mode is executed, the display mode of the hold display is changed. When the failure mode change suggestion effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display may not be changed.

  In the above embodiment, in both cases of the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the appearing character is the same action (the effect that acts on the active display or the hold display, for example, the ball However, the present invention is not limited to such a form, but in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, while the character that has appeared performs an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display In the failure mode change suggestion effect, the appearing character may not perform an action for changing the display mode of the active display or the hold display. It should be noted that the action performed by the appearing character may be different between the change suggestion effect of the success mode and the change suggestion effect of the failure mode. For example, in the change suggestion effect of the success mode, the active display or the hold display to be changed is changed. The action of throwing the ball in the direction (effect that acts on the active display or hold display) is performed. In the change suggestion effect of the failure mode, the action of throwing the ball in a direction different from the active display or hold display (active display or hold display) You may make it perform the production which does not act.

  In the above embodiment, as the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode executed within a predetermined period from when the variable display is started until the reach state is established, the next change suggestion effect within the predetermined period is increased. The ratio of execution is high, and the higher the ratio of the number of executions of the change suggestion effect of the success mode with respect to the number of executions of the change suggestion effect executed within the predetermined period, the higher the jackpot expectation degree is shown . However, the predetermined period is not limited to this, and from the start of the change of the decorative pattern to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (a combination of decorative patterns or a pseudo continuous pattern that will be re-variable (pseudo-continuous) after temporary stop). It may be a period, or may be a period from when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped to when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped again after the decorative symbol is changed again (that is, a period between pseudo-continuations). Note that the predetermined period may be a period from the start of decorative pattern variation until the first left middle right decorative symbol first stops. It may be a period until the final stop.

  In the above embodiment, when a plurality of change suggestion effects are executed, there may be a plurality of patterns of periods from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect. For example, when the interval from the end of one change suggestion effect to the start of the next change suggestion effect is long, the rate of success of the next change suggestion effect is higher than that when the interval is short, and the jackpot expectation May be high. Further, in the case where a large number of change suggestion effects are executed, the interval may be gradually shortened, and the jackpot expectation may be gradually increased accordingly. According to such a form, when the player has finished one change suggestion effect, whether or not the next change suggestion effect is executed and the interval until the next change suggestion effect is started. Become interested and improve interest.

  In said embodiment, according to the present setting value (1-6) regarding the pachinko game machine 1, you may make it the ratio which changes the display mode of an active display differ. For example, compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the case where the set value is high (4 to 6) has a higher ratio of the display mode of the active display being different from the normal mode. You may do it. Further, when the set value is high (4 to 6) compared to the case where the set value is low (1 to 3), the number of changes in the display color of the active display is larger (for example, 3 times or more). The ratio at which the pattern is selected is high, that is, the ratio at which the success mode change suggestion effect is executed, or the ratio at which the success mode change suggestion effect is continuous may be high. Further, when the set value is higher (4 to 6) than when the set value is low (1 to 3), a change suggestion effect of a specific type (for example, an effect in which a character X having a low appearance frequency appears). The rate at which is executed may be increased.

[Explanation regarding the feature 04TM]
Next, the feature section 04TM will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-20.

  First, the operation unit in the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 11A is a plan view showing the operation unit in the present embodiment, and shows the operation unit when the lower side is viewed from the upper side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. 11-2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 11-1, and is a view when a split hemisphere described later is in a fully closed state. FIG. 11C is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 04TM111 for supplying game balls is formed in the lower housing 04TM101 arranged below the gaming machine.

  An operation unit is provided on the player side of the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 04TM111, and the operation unit includes a hemispherical spherical button 04TM102A and a disk-shaped push button 04TM102B. When the effect control CPU 120 detects that the sphere button 04TM102A is operated, it can execute a result notification effect described later as an operation effect corresponding to the operation of the sphere button 04TM102A, and detects that the push button 04TM102B is operated. Then, a cut-in notice effect described later can be executed as an operation effect corresponding to the operation of the push button 04TM102B.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, a sphere button 04TM102A formed of a transparent synthetic resin is installed on the player side (front side) of the hit ball supply tray 04TM111. The spherical button 04TM102A is hollow, and as shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, a hemispherical portion 04TM121 is formed at the upper portion, and a cylindrical portion 04TM122 is formed at the lower portion. A cylindrical guide hole 04TM112 is formed in the lower housing 04TM101, and a spherical button 04TM102A is inserted into the guide hole 04TM112 so as to be movable in the vertical direction in FIGS. Is always biased upward. When the player presses the sphere button 04TM102A, the spring 04TM123 is compressed, the sphere button 04TM102A moves downward in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, and the proximity switch 04TM124 operates.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (any one of the special operation promotion display 04TM035, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C). If the proximity switch 04TM124 is actuated in response to the operation of the sphere button 04TM102A, the result notification effect is executed. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the push button 04TM102B has been operated in a state where the predetermined condition is satisfied (a state in which the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed) (similar to the push sensor 35B described above). Is detected, the cut-in notice effect is executed.

  A spherical light emitter 04TM103 is disposed on the axial center of the hemispherical portion 04TM121 of the spherical button 04TM102A. The light emitter 04TM103 is an LED bulb that emits white light, for example. Rotating shafts 04TM131 and 04TM132 passing through the axial center of the light emitter 04TM103 are integrally formed on opposite sides of the outer periphery of the light emitter 04TM103. The rotating shafts 04TM131 and 04TM132 are rotatably supported by the ribs 04TM113 and 04TM114 of the lower housing 04TM101, respectively. The ribs 04TM113 and 04TM114 are formed in the lower casing 04TM101 in the vertical direction of FIG. A gear 04TM133 is fixed to the right end of the right rotation shaft 04TM132. A gear 04TM135 fixed to the output shaft of the rotation motor 04TM134 attached to the right rib 04TM114 meshes with the gear 04TM133. The effect control CPU 120 rotates the rotation motor 04TM134. When the rotation motor 04TM134 rotates and the rotation shaft 04TM132 rotates, the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotation shaft 04TM131 rotate simultaneously.

  The outer periphery of the light emitter 04TM103 is covered with a pair of split hemispheres 04TM141A, 04TM141B. The fission hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are formed of a synthetic resin that is translucent and colored (for example, red). The divisional hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B can be opened and closed in the left-right direction of FIG. 11-2, and complementary jagged edges are formed at the joint. Cylindrical rotating sleeves 04TM142A and 04TM142B are integrally fixed to the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B, respectively, on the axis thereof. The left rotation sleeve 04TM142A is fitted on the left rotation shaft 04TM131 so as to be movable in the left-right direction in FIG. 11-2, and the right rotation sleeve 04TM142B is movable on the right rotation shaft 04TM132 in the left-right direction in FIG. It is fitted. The keys 04TM143A and 04TM143B are fixed to the rotary shafts 04TM131 and 04TM132, respectively, and the keys 04TM143A and 04TM143B are slidably fitted in the key grooves 04TM144A and 04TM144B formed in the rotary sleeves 04TM142A and 04TM142B, respectively. Accordingly, when the rotation shafts 04TM131 and 04TM132 rotate, the rotation sleeves 04TM142A and 04TM142B rotate.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-3, the cylindrical portion 04TM122 of the spherical button 04TM102A has long grooves 04TM125A and 04TM125B formed on the left and right sides of FIG. 11-2. The long grooves 04TM125A and 04TM125B are formed long in the vertical direction of FIG. A rotating shaft 04TM131 and a rotating sleeve 04TM142A are disposed extending through the left long groove 04TM125A and extending to the left in FIG. 11-2. Similarly, a rotation shaft 04TM132 and a rotation sleeve 04TM142B are arranged extending rightward in FIG. 11-2 through the right long groove 04TM125B. Therefore, the spherical button 04TM102A can be operated up and down without interfering with the rotating sleeves 04TM142A and 04TM142B.

  In the lower casing 04TM101, ribs 04TM115 and 04TM116 are formed below the rotation shafts 04TM131 and 04TM132 in the left-right direction in FIG. Guide blocks 04TM145A and 04TM145B are fixed to the ribs 04TM115 and 04TM116. Guide grooves 04TM146A, 04TM146B are formed on the upper surfaces of the guide blocks 04TM145A, 04TM145B, and the lower ends of the nuts 04TM147A, 04TM147B are guided by the guide grooves 04TM146A, 04TM146B, and are movable in the left-right direction in FIG. The upper ends of the nuts 04TM147A and 04TM147B are fitted in annular grooves 04TM148A and 04TM148B formed on the outer circumferences of the rotating sleeves 04TM142A and 04TM142B, respectively. Feed screws 04TM149A and 04TM149B are screwed into the female threads formed on the nuts 04TM147A and 04TM147B. A gear 04TM151A is fixed to the left end of the left feed screw 04TM149A. A gear 04TM153A fixed to the output shaft of the opening / closing motor 04TM152A attached to the left rib 04TM115 meshes with the gear 04TM151A. Similarly, a gear 04TM151B is fixed to the right end of the right feed screw 04TM149B. A gear 04TM153B fixed to the output shaft of the opening / closing motor 04TM152B attached to the right rib 04TM116 meshes with the gear 04TM151B.

  When the player presses the spherical button 04TM102A to activate the proximity switch 04TM124, the effect control CPU 120 causes the light emitter 04TM103 to emit light and rotates the opening / closing motors 04TM152A and 04TM152B. When the opening / closing motors 04TM152A and 04TM152B rotate, the feed screws 04TM149A and 04TM149B rotate, the left nut 04TM147A moves to the left in FIG. 11-2, and the rotating sleeve 04TM142A moves to the left in FIG. 11-2. . Further, the right nut 04TM147B moves in the right direction in FIG. 11-2, and the rotating sleeve 04TM142B moves in the right direction in FIG. 11-2. As a result, the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B start to open from the fully closed state of FIG. 11-2, and can be arbitrarily changed to the fully open state of FIG. 11-4.

  FIG. 11-5 is an operation explanatory diagram illustrating a change in the open state of the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B. As shown in FIG. 5, the divisional hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B can arbitrarily change the open state from the fully closed state of (a) to the intermediate open state of (b) and (c) and the fully open state of (d). Furthermore, it becomes possible to rotate the split hemispheres 04TM141A, 04TM141B and the light emitter 04TM103 in any open state. As a result, the white light of the illuminant 04TM103 radiating from the jagged opening of the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B and the red light radiated from the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B fluctuate irregularly, improving the effect on the player It becomes possible to make it.

  In the example described below, when the split hemispheres 04TM141A, 04TM141B are in the fully closed state, the normal mode of the spherical button 04TM102A is set. Is the first special mode of the spherical button 04TM102A, and when the split hemispheres 04TM141A, 04TM141B are open and the opening is medium (the crack width is larger than the first special mode and smaller than the third special mode) ) Is the second special mode of the spherical button 04TM102A, and when the split hemispheres 04TM141A, 04TM141B are open and the opening degree is the largest (when the crack width is maximum), the third special mode of the spherical button 04TM102A It is said.

  FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the hold display and the operation related display. On the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5, a hold display area 04TM004 for displaying the first hold memory number (0 to 4 hold displays 04TM002) is provided. A special effect area 04TM003 for displaying an action-related display 04TM001 composed of images is provided.

  When the first reserved memory number is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of reserved displays 04TM002 corresponding to the first reserved memory number in the reserved display area 04TM004. In other words, the hold display 04TM002 is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, although the start condition (for example, winning to the first start winning opening) is satisfied but the start condition (for example, the special symbol variation display is not executed). And the second reserved memory number is 0, and the first reserved memory number is not 0), which is information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (and the decorative symbol variable display). .

  Further, in the lower left part of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a special effect area 04TM003 that is an area different from the hold display area 04TM004 and displays the operation related display 04TM001. In the hold display area 04TM004, the start condition is established first from the hold display 04TM002 closer to the special effect area 04TM003, and the variable display corresponding to the hold display 04TM002 is executed in order from the left as viewed from the player. Will be.

  In this embodiment, there are a normal mode (round shape), a first specific mode (hammer shape), and a second specific mode (sword shape) as display modes of the hold display. Each hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 side by one at the timing when the variable display is started. Here, of the hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004, the hold display 04TM002 displayed at the position closest to the special effect area 04TM003 (leftmost) is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 (hold) When the display 04TM002 and the operation related display 04TM001 overlap each other), the display 04TM002 is erased (not displayed). Therefore, it appears to the player as if the hold display 04TM002 was absorbed by the motion related display 04TM001 and disappeared.

  The motion related display 04TM001 is configured by an image imitating the sphere button 04TM102A, and is information related to the operation of the sphere button 04TM102A, and an operation effect (result notification described later) executed in response to the operation of the sphere button 04TM102A. Information related to production). The action-related display 04TM001 in the present embodiment includes a period during which the special symbol variation display is being executed (a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is being executed), and a period during which the special symbol has been confirmed and stopped (the decorative symbol is This is information that can be displayed in any period of the period during which the settlement is stopped. It is also displayed when the number of reserved storage is zero.

  In the present embodiment, as an operation effect executed in response to the operation of the sphere button 04TM102A, a combination of decorative symbols whose display result is a big hit is stopped and displayed, and a victory effect in which an ally character wins an enemy character, or display A combination of decorative patterns that result in a loss of result is stopped and displayed, and any of the defeat effects in which the ally character loses to the enemy character is executed. The victory effect and the defeat effect may be collectively referred to as a result notification effect.

  The action-related display 04TM001 is information that can be displayed regardless of whether or not the special symbol fluctuation display is being executed (decorative symbol fluctuation display is being executed) or not depending on the number of reserved memories. May be information (so-called active display) corresponding to the fluctuation display being executed (variation display for which the start condition is satisfied). Specifically, when the motion-related display 04TM001 is displayed in the normal mode, it is not possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is executed by itself, but the hold display 04TM002 is special when the variable display is started. It is possible to grasp the period from the timing shifted to the effect area 04TM003 (the timing at which the hold display 04TM002 and the action related display 04TM001 overlap) to the end of the variable display as the period during which the variable display is executed. Therefore, the operation-related display 04TM001 in the normal mode during this period corresponds to information corresponding to the variable display being executed (so-called active display). In addition, when the motion-related display 04TM001 is displayed in a special mode (any one of the first special mode, the second special mode, and the third special mode) different from the normal mode, only the special mode-related display 04TM001 is displayed. Thus, the player can grasp at least that the variable display is executed. Therefore, the operation related display 04TM001 in the special mode corresponds to information corresponding to the variable display being executed (so-called active display).

  In the present embodiment, the motion-related display 04TM001 can be displayed in the low base state, and is not displayed in the high base state and the big hit gaming state. In addition, the motion-related display 04TM001 is not displayed during the display of the demonstration screen that is displayed when the period during which the game ball does not win any of the winning areas reaches a predetermined period in the low base state. In some cases, the display is hidden during execution of a specific effect such as a so-called blackout effect.

  Thus, when the variable display is executed, the motion-related display may play a role as an active display (information corresponding to the special symbol variable display), but when the variable display is not executed. However, since the motion related display is displayed, the presence as an object different from the active display can be emphasized, and the player can be focused on the motion related display regardless of whether or not the variable display is performed.

  As a display mode of the motion related display 04TM001, a normal mode in which the sphere is not cracked, a first special mode [crack (small)] in which the sphere has small cracks, and a moderate (first special mode in the sphere) 2nd special mode [crack (middle)] containing cracks larger than the crack of the second special mode) and 3rd special mode [crack (large)] containing large cracks in the sphere There is. The display mode of the action-related display 04TM001 changes according to the execution of a change suggestion effect described later.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display of decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, the special effect area 04TM003 is usually displayed. The operation related display 04TM001 of the aspect is displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the first reserved memory number is 2, in the hold display area 04TM004, the normal mode (round) is held in the order close to the special effect area 04TM003 (from the left as viewed from the player). Two hold displays, a display 04TM002 and a hold display of the second specific mode (sword shape), are displayed.

  The hold display 04TM002 in the first specific mode (hammer type) and the hold display 04TM002 in the second specific mode (sword shape) are easily conspicuous because the displayed size is larger than the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode (round shape). The player has high visibility. As described above, the hold display 04TM002 in the first specific mode and the hold display 04TM002 in the second specific mode are displayed larger than the hold display in the normal mode, whereby the hold display 04TM002 in the first specific mode and the second specific mode. It is possible to improve the interest of the production using the hold display.

  In addition, the motion-related display 04TM001 is easily noticeable because it is displayed in a larger size compared to the hold display 04TM002, and is highly visible to the player. In this way, regardless of whether or not the variable display is executed, the action related display 04TM001 is displayed in the special effect area 04TM003, so that the action related display 04TM001 is noticed and the effect using the action related display is displayed. Interest can be improved.

  FIG. 11-7 is a flowchart illustrating the change suggestion effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes a change suggestion effect determination process in the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) of the effect control process shown in FIG. In the change suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display mode of the motion related display corresponding to the variable display based on the new start winning prize, and also determines the change pattern of the motion related display. In addition, the number of executions and types of change suggestion effects to be executed when changing the display mode of the motion-related display or not changing, and a change pattern of the hold display corresponding to the variable display based on a new start prize decide.

  In the change suggestion effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first has a set of start winning commands (for example, a symbol designating command, a variable category command, and the like based on the occurrence of the starting winning at the first starting winning opening. It is confirmed whether or not a new first reserved memory number addition designation command has been received (step S04TM1000).

  The symbol designating command is an effect control command indicating whether or not the winning determination result is a big hit and the determination result of the type of big hit. The CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot will be based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number extracted at the time of starting winning, and determines the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot and designates the determination result Outputs the specified command. The variation category command is an effect control command that indicates a variation pattern determination result among the winning determination results. Based on the random number for determining the variation pattern type extracted at the time of starting winning, the CPU 103 determines whether or not normal reach, super reach or the like, and outputs a variation category command for designating the determination result To do. The first reserved memory number addition designation command is an effect control command for designating that the first reserved memory number has increased by one.

  Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not one set of symbol designation command, variable category command, and first reserved memory number addition designation command is newly stored in the start winning command storage area. . If a new command for starting winning a prize has not been received (NO in step S04TM1000), the process ends.

  If a command at the time of a start winning prize is newly received, the production control CPU 120 sets the final display mode of the motion-related display in the final display mode determination table of the motion-related display (see FIG. 11-8). Based on the determination (step S04TM1010). The processing after step S04TM1010 may be executed only when the change pattern type specified by the change category command is normal reach or super reach, and is executed only when it is super reach. Anyway.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-6 described above, the motion-related display can be displayed regardless of whether or not the decorative symbol variation display is executed. The final display mode of the action-related display is from the start to the end of the decorative pattern change display corresponding to the command at the time of start winning received by the effect control CPU 120 (until the decorative pattern is confirmed and stopped). This is a final display mode of the operation-related display in the period.

  FIG. 11-8A is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a final display mode determination table for motion-related display. As shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), in this embodiment, as the final display mode of the motion-related display, the normal mode, the first special mode [crack (small)], and the second special mode [crack (medium) ] And the third special aspect [crack (large)] can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these aspects.

  As shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), when the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result specified by the symbol designating command is “out”), execution is performed based on the start winning. The final display mode of the motion-related display corresponding to the variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed is the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) at a rate of 90%, and the first special mode [crack (small) at a rate of 18%. ] (Spherical image with small cracks) and 2% of the second special mode [crack (medium)] (medium (larger than the first special mode and smaller than the third special mode) sphere with cracks Image) and a third special mode [crack (large)] (spherical image with large cracks) at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result specified by the symbol designation command is “big hit”), it corresponds to the variable display of decorative symbols executed based on the start winning. The final display mode of the motion-related display is the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) at a rate of 15%, and the first special mode [crack (small)] (spherical image with small cracks) at a rate of 30%. The second special mode [crack (medium)] (spherical image with moderate cracks) is formed at a rate of 54%, and the third special mode [crack (large)] (large cracks are generated at a rate of 1%. A certain spherical image).

  As described above, when the final display mode of the motion related display becomes the third special mode, the ratio of the big hit becomes the highest, and when the final display mode of the motion related display becomes the second special mode, the big hit Is the second highest and the final display mode of the motion related display is the first special mode, the ratio of the big hit is the third highest, and the final display mode of the motion related display is the normal mode. In that case, the ratio of big hits is the lowest. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), regarding the display mode of the motion-related display, the expectation that the big hit is high in the order of normal mode <first special mode <second special mode <third special mode is high. Become.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), when the display result is “out of”, the rate at which the final display mode of the motion-related display is the third special mode [crack (large)] is 0%. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit”, the final display mode of the motion-related display is 1% of the third special mode [crack (large)]. When the display mode is the third special mode [crack (large)], the display result is “big hit” at a rate of 100%. That is, the action-related display of the third special mode [crack (large)] is an effect that determines that a big hit will be made. According to such a configuration, the player's interest in the motion related display can be increased and the interest can be improved.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the change pattern determination table for the motion-related display (see FIGS. 11-8 (B), (C), (D), and (E)) for the change pattern related to the display mode of the motion-related display. ) (Step S04TM1020).

  FIGS. 11-8 (B), (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory views showing specific examples of change patterns of operation-related display. As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B), (C), (D), and (E), in this embodiment, from the display mode at the start of the change to the final display mode (the display mode determined in step S04TM1010). ) Is provided with a plurality of change patterns as change patterns for changing the display mode of the operation related display. Here, the display mode at the start of variation is the display of hold corresponding to the variation display (round shape, hammer shape, or sword shape) when the variation display of decorative symbols is started (or started). This is a display mode of the operation related display when the (object) is shifted from the hold display area 04TM004 to the special effect area 04TM003 (as a result, the hold display is erased). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol variation display is not executed, the normal-related operation-related display is displayed, and therefore the display mode at the start of variation is always the normal mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), as the change pattern of the action related display, the action related display at the start of the fluctuation is a normal mode, and thereafter the change suggesting effect is not executed and the action related display is not changed. The change pattern 101 in which the display mode remains the normal mode and the motion-related display at the start of the change are the normal mode, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the motion-related display does not change and the final display mode Is the normal mode, and the motion-related display at the start of the fluctuation is the normal mode, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the motion-related display does not change, and then the second time The change suggestion effect is executed, but the motion-related display does not change and the final display mode remains the normal mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), the motion-related display at the start of the fluctuation is the normal mode, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed, the motion-related display changes, and the final display mode is The change pattern 111 that is the first special mode [break (small)] and the motion-related display at the start of the variation are normal modes, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the motion-related display does not change. After that, the second change suggestion effect is executed, the motion-related display is changed, and the change display pattern 112 in which the final display mode is the first special mode [crack (small)] and the motion-related display at the start of the variation are usually displayed. After that, the first change suggestion effect is executed, the action-related display changes, the display mode becomes the first special mode [break (small)], and then the second change suggestion effect is executed. The motion-related display does not change and the final table Aspects the change pattern 113 remains in the first special aspect [cracking (small)], there is.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (D), the motion-related display at the start of the fluctuation is a normal mode, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed, the motion-related display changes, and the final display mode is The change pattern 121 that becomes the second special mode [crack (medium)] and the motion-related display at the start of the change are normal modes, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed, but the motion-related display does not change. After that, the second change suggestion effect is executed, the motion-related display is changed, and the change display pattern 122 in which the final display mode is the second special mode [crack (medium)] and the motion-related display at the start of the variation are usually displayed. After that, the first change suggestion effect is executed and the operation-related display changes, the display mode becomes the first special mode [break (small)], and then the second change suggestion effect is executed and the operation The related display changes and the final display state Is the second special mode [crack (medium)] change pattern 123 and the motion-related display at the start of the change is a normal mode, then the first change suggestion effect is executed, the motion-related display changes, The display mode becomes the second special mode [crack (middle)], and then the second change suggestion effect is executed, but the motion-related display does not change, and the final display mode is the second special mode [crack (middle)]. And a change pattern 124 that remains.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (E), the motion-related display at the start of fluctuation is the normal mode, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed and the motion-related display changes, and the final display mode is The change pattern 131 that becomes the third special mode [crack (large)] and the motion-related display at the start of the change are normal modes, and then the first change suggesting effect is executed, but the motion-related display does not change. After that, the second change suggestion effect is executed, the motion related display is changed, and the final display mode is the third special mode [crack (large)], and the motion related display at the start of the variation is usually After that, the first change suggestion effect is executed and the operation-related display changes, the display mode becomes the first special mode [crack (small)], and then the second change suggestion effect is executed and operated. The related display changes and the final display state Is the third special mode [crack (large)] and the movement-related display at the start of the change is a normal mode, and then the first change suggestion effect is executed and the movement-related display changes, The display mode becomes the second special mode [crack (medium)], then the second change suggestion effect is executed, the operation-related display changes, and the final display mode becomes the third special mode [crack (large)]. There is a change pattern 134.

  In the present embodiment, with the start of variable display, the round, hammer-shaped or sword-shaped hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 ( (After the shifted hold display 04TM002 and the motion related display 04TM001 in the normal mode overlap), (1) when the display mode of the motion related display does not change from the normal mode to the end (change patterns 101, 102, 103), (2) When the display mode of the motion related display finally changes to the first special mode [crack (small)] (change patterns 111, 112, 113), and (3) The display mode of the motion related display is final. And (4) the display state of the motion related display, when changing to the second special mode [crack (medium)] (change pattern 121, 122, 123, 124) There may change the final third special aspect [cracking (large) and (change pattern 131, 132, 133), there is.

  As shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), when the final display mode of the motion-related display determined in step S04TM1010 is the normal mode, the display result is “out of” (ie, specified by the symbol designating command). When the display result is “out of”, the change pattern 101 becomes 60%, the change pattern 102 becomes 39%, the change pattern 103 becomes 1%, and the display result is “big hit”. (Ie, when the display result designated by the symbol designation command is “big hit”), the change pattern 101 becomes 38%, the change pattern 102 becomes 60%, and changes 2%. Pattern 103 is obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 11-8 (C), when the final display mode of the motion-related display determined in step S04TM1010 is the first special mode [crack (small)], the display result is “out of” ( That is, when the display result designated by the symbol designation command is “out of”, the change pattern 111 becomes 60%, the change pattern 112 becomes 39%, and the change pattern 113 becomes 1%. When the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the symbol designation command is “big hit”), the change pattern 111 becomes 38% and the change pattern 112 becomes 60%. Thus, the change pattern 113 is formed at a rate of 2%.

  As shown in FIG. 11-8 (D), when the final display mode of the motion-related display determined in step S04TM1010 is the second special mode [crack (medium)], the display result is “out of” ( That is, when the display result designated by the symbol designation command is “out of”, the change pattern 121 becomes 50%, the change pattern 122 becomes 30%, and the change pattern 123 becomes 19%. When the change pattern 123 becomes 1%, and the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result specified by the symbol designation command is “big hit”), the change pattern 121 becomes 13%. The change pattern 122 becomes a ratio of 35%, the change pattern 123 becomes a ratio of 49%, and the change pattern 123 becomes a ratio of 3%. That.

  As shown in FIG. 11-8 (E), when the final display mode of the motion-related display determined in step S04TM1010 is the third special mode [crack (large)], the display result is “big hit” ( That is, when the display result designated by the symbol designation command is “big hit”, the change pattern 131 becomes 10%, the change pattern 132 becomes 20%, and the change pattern 133 becomes 30%. The change pattern 133 is formed at a rate of 40%. As described above, when the final display mode of the motion-related display is the third special mode [crack (large)], the display result is always “big hit”, and thus the determination value when the display result is “out of range”. Is not allocated.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) to (D), regarding the change pattern of the motion-related display, when the final display mode is the normal mode, the order of change pattern 101 <change pattern 102 <change pattern 103 is satisfied. In the case where the expected degree of big hit becomes high and the final display mode is the first special mode [crack (small)], the expected degree of big hit in the order of change pattern 111 <change pattern 112 <change pattern 113 In the case where the final display mode is the second special mode [crack (medium)], the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit in the order of change pattern 121 <change pattern 122 <change pattern 123 <change pattern 124 is high. Therefore, when the change suggestion effect is executed twice, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is higher than when the change suggestion effect is executed once. And when the change suggestion effect is executed twice, the display state of the operation related display does not change in the first change suggestion effect when the display state of the operation related display changes in the first change suggestion effect. Expectation that becomes big hit than time is high. In addition, the rate at which the change pattern that does not change the display mode of the motion-related display in the second change suggestion effect is extremely low.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the display mode of the motion-related display may change to a mode with a higher jackpot expectation, while the display mode of the motion-related display has a lower jackpot expectation. The change pattern is set so that there is no possibility of changing the mode. That is, a pattern that changes from the third special mode [crack (large)] to the second special mode [crack (medium)] or the first special mode [crack (small)] is not provided, and the second special mode [ There is also no pattern that changes from crack (medium)] to the first special mode [crack (small)]. Moreover, the pattern which changes in any one of a 1st special aspect [crack (small)]-a 3rd special aspect [crack (large)] to a normal aspect is not provided. Thereby, the player's expectation during the variable display is maintained.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first change suggestion effect. That is, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute at least one change suggestion effect. If it is not decided to execute the first change suggestion effect (NO in step S04TM1030), that is, if the determined number of executions of the change suggestion effect is 0, the process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined to perform the first change suggestion effect (YES in step S04TM1030), the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode of the first change suggestion effect to the first change suggestion effect determination table (FIG. 11-9 (F)) (step S04TM1040).

  FIG. 11-9 (F) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a table for determining the first change suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 11-9 (F), in this embodiment, for each change pattern of the motion-related display (change pattern determined in step S04TM1020), a plurality of types are provided as the first change suggestion effect. A determination value for deciding which type of change suggestion effect to execute among the change suggestion effects (first change suggestion effect, second change suggestion effect, and third change suggestion effect) is assigned.

  As a change suggestion effect, a first change suggestion effect in which a teammate character without a weapon performs an action of hitting the motion-related display, and a second change suggestion in which a teammate character with a hammer performs an action to hit the motion-related display There is an effect, and a third change suggesting effect in which an ally character with a sword performs an action of cutting the action-related display. Any of the first change suggestion effect to the third change suggestion effect is an effect in which the appearing ally character acts on the action-related display, and the player changes the display mode of the action-related display when the ally character appears. Expect to do.

  When the first change suggestion effect is executed in the present embodiment, (i) if the first change suggestion effect is determined to be the first change suggestion effect (no weapon), the weapon is held. An unaffiliated character appears from the right side of the screen, and then the first change suggestion effect (no weapon) is executed. (Ii) The type of the first change suggestion effect is determined as the second change suggestion effect (hammer). If the ally character with the hammer appears from the right side of the screen, then the second change suggestion effect (hammer) is executed, and (iii) the type of the first change suggestion effect is the third. If the change suggestion effect (sword) is determined, a teammate character with a sword appears from the right side of the screen, and then the third change suggestion effect (sword) is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 11-9 (F), when the change pattern of the motion-related display determined in step S04TM1020 is the change pattern 102, the first change suggestion effect is the first rate of 80%. It becomes a change suggestion effect, becomes a second change suggestion effect at a rate of 20%, becomes a third change suggestion effect at a rate of 0%, and in the case of the change pattern 111, becomes a first change suggestion effect at a rate of 35%. In the case of the change pattern 121, the second change suggesting effect is generated at a rate of 40%, and in the case of the change pattern 121, the first change suggesting effect is generated at a rate of 20%. It becomes the second change suggestion effect, becomes the third change suggestion effect at a rate of 45%, and in the case of the change pattern 131, it becomes the first change suggestion effect at the rate of 5%, and the second change suggestion at the rate of 25%. In the case of the change pattern 103, the change suggestion effect is 80%, the first change suggestion effect is 80%, the second change suggestion effect is 20%, and 0%. In the case of the change pattern 112, the first change suggestion effect is obtained at a rate of 80%, the second change suggestion effect is produced at a rate of 20%, and the third change suggestion effect is produced at a rate of 0%. In the case of the change suggestion effect, in the case of the change pattern 113, the change change effect becomes the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 35%, becomes the second change suggestion effect at the rate of 40%, becomes the third change suggestion effect at the rate of 25%, In the case of the change pattern 122, the change pattern 123 is the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 80%, the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 20%, and the third change suggestion effect at a rate of 0%. In case 35%, the first change suggesting effect is 40%, the second change suggesting effect is 40%, the third change suggesting effect is 25%, and the change pattern 124 is 20%. It becomes the first change suggestion effect at the rate of 35%, becomes the second change suggestion effect at the rate of 45%, and becomes the third change suggestion effect at the rate of 45%. When it is a change pattern 133, it becomes the first change suggestion effect at the rate of 35%, and becomes the second change suggestion effect at the rate of 20%. In the case of the change pattern 134, it becomes the first change suggesting effect at a rate of 20%, and the second change suggestive effect at the rate of 35%. Become a change suggestion , The third change suggestion effect at a rate of 40%.

  As described above, the second change suggestion effect has a higher rate of change in the display state of the action related display than the first change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect has a more action related display than the second change suggestion effect. There is a high rate of change in the display mode. When the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect is executed, the display mode of the operation related display may not change, while when the third change suggesting effect is executed, the operation related display is displayed. The aspect is always changing. As described above, when the display mode of the motion-related display is changed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the display mode of the motion-related display is not changed. Therefore, the first change suggesting effect <the second change suggesting effect <the first The expectation level for jackpots increases in the order of the 3 changes suggestion. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not a teammate character appears (whether or not a change suggesting effect is executed). Furthermore, when an ally character appears (when a change suggestion effect is executed), attention is paid to the type of item possessed by the ally character (variation suggestion effect types: no weapon, hammer, sword). Thereby, the interest of change suggestion production can be improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first change suggestion effect is related to the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display. The display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display is that the hold display is shifted from the second closest position to the special effect area 04TM003 in the hold display area 04TM004 to the position closest to the next (position where the variable display is executed). This is the final display mode of the subsequent hold display.

  In the present embodiment, when the first change suggestion effect (without weapon) is determined as the first change suggestion effect, the change display in which the change suggestion effect is executed at the time of the final shift of the hold display corresponding to the variable display is performed. The change pattern of the hold display is determined so that the display mode is the normal mode (no weapon). Further, when the second change suggestion effect (hammer) is determined as the first change suggestion effect, the display mode at the time of the last shift of the hold display corresponding to the variable display in which the change suggestion effect is executed is the first. The change pattern of the hold display is determined so as to be one specific mode (hammer). Further, when the third change suggestion effect (sword) is determined as the first change suggestion effect, the display mode at the time of the last shift of the hold display corresponding to the variable display in which the change suggestion effect is executed is the first. The change pattern of the hold display is determined so that the two specific modes (swords) are obtained.

  In the present embodiment, since the display mode of the hold display at the time of the final shift is the final display mode of the hold display, the hold display is closest to the special effect area 04TM003 in the hold display area 04TM004 (next. The display mode of the hold display does not change when it is at the position where the variable display is executed, and the hold display shifts from the position closest to the special effect area 04TM003 in the hold display area 04TM004 to the special effect area 04TM003 ( The display mode of the hold display does not change even at the timing immediately before the hold display overlaps with the operation-related display 04TM001 and is erased, and when the variable display corresponding to the hold display is started.

  That is, when it is determined that the change suggestion effect is to be executed, when the hold display is in the normal mode (round shape) at the time of the final shift, the first time in the variable display corresponding to the hold display. When the first change suggestion effect (no weapon) is executed as the change suggestion effect and the hold display is the first specific mode (hammer) at the time of the final shift, in the variable display corresponding to the hold display, If the second change suggestion effect (hammer) is executed as the first change suggestion effect and the hold display is the second specific mode (sword) at the time of the final shift, the variable display corresponding to the hold display is performed. In this case, the third change suggestion effect (sword) is executed as the first change suggestion effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by providing a relationship between the display mode of the hold display and the change suggestion effect with respect to the operation related display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the change pattern of the hold display based on the change display determination table of the hold display (see FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11) (step S04TM1050).

  FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of a change display determination table for a hold display for determining a change pattern for the hold display. When the first reserved memory number becomes n (n: 1 to 4) due to the start winning, (i) the timing at which the nth hold display 04TM002 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 ( At the time of the start winning), the nth hold display 04TM002 corresponding to the start winning is displayed in the first specific mode (hammer type) or the second specific mode (sword shape) different from the normal mode (round shape). There is a possibility. Further, (ii) when n ≧ 2, the hold display 04TM002 corresponding to the start winning is in a position higher in the change ranking in the hold display area 04TM004 (position closer to the special effect area 04TM003 by one). There is a possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes (changes from the normal mode to the first specific mode or the second specific mode, or from the first specific mode to the second specific mode) at the shifted timing. Therefore, when the first reserved memory number becomes 2 (n = 2) due to the start winning, the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 may change once, and the first reserved memory number becomes 3 due to the start winning. When the above is satisfied (n ≧ 3), the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 may change twice.

  In FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, for each change pattern, at what timing (i) and (ii), the display mode of the display information (holding display 04TM002) corresponding to the variable display will be displayed. Show. In the change patterns shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-11, “normal” indicates a round normal mode, “hammer” indicates a hammer-shaped first specific mode, and “sword "" Indicates a second specific form of a sword shape.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “1”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display for one hold shown in FIG. 11-10 (H). Select the change pattern determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 11-10 (H), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the first change suggestion effect (no weapon), the determination result at the time of starting winning (designation command) The change result 201 becomes a change pattern 201 at a rate of 100% regardless of the display result designated by (1). The change pattern 201 is a change pattern in which a hold display subject to notice is displayed in a normal manner at the time of starting winning. Regarding the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Regardless, the change pattern 202 is formed at a rate of 100%. The change pattern 202 is a change pattern for displaying a hold display to be notified in a first specific manner at the time of starting winning a prize. In the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Regardless, the change pattern 203 is formed at a rate of 100%. The change pattern 203 is a change pattern for displaying a hold display to be notified in a second specific manner at the time of starting winning.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “2”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display for two holds shown in FIG. 11-10 (I). Select the change pattern determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 11-10 (I), in the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the first change suggestion effect (no weapon), the determination result at the time of starting winning (designation command) The change result 211 is a rate of 100% regardless of the display result designated by (1). The change pattern 211 is a change pattern in which the notice target hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and then the notice target hold display is not changed in the normal form at the timing of the final shift.

  Regarding the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 212 and the change pattern 213, respectively. The change pattern 212 is a change pattern in which the notice target hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the notice target hold display is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift. 213 is a change pattern that does not change the notice target hold display in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the first specific mode (hammer) when starting winning. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 11-10 (I), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the display result is “out of” (that is, the display result). When the display result designated by the designation command is “out of place”, the change pattern 212 is formed at a rate of 30%, the change pattern 213 is formed at a rate of 70%, and the display result is “big hit” (ie, When the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “big hit”), the change pattern 212 becomes 70% and the change pattern 213 becomes 30%.

  In the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 214, the change pattern 215, and the change pattern 216, respectively. The change pattern 214 is a change pattern in which the notice target hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of winning the start, and then the notice target hold display is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. 215 is a change pattern in which the notice target hold display is displayed in the first specific mode (hammer) at the time of starting winning, and then the notice target hold display is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. The change pattern 216 does not change the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the time of starting winning. It is a change pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 11-10 (I), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the display result is “out of” (that is, the display result). When the display result designated by the designation command is “out of”, the change pattern 214 is formed at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 215 is formed at a rate of 30%, and the change pattern 216 is formed at a rate of 60%. When the result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the change pattern 214 becomes 60% and the change pattern 215 becomes 30%. The change pattern 216 is formed at a rate of 10%.

  When the first reserved memory count stored in the first reserved memory count storage area is “3”, the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display for the three holds shown in FIG. 11-10 (J). Select the change pattern determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 11-10 (J), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the first change suggestion effect (no weapon), the determination result at the time of starting winning (designation command) The change result 221 is displayed at a rate of 100% regardless of the display result designated by (1). The change pattern 221 indicates that the notice target hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the notice target hold display is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of one shift, and the notice target display is changed at the final shift timing. It is a change pattern which does not change a hold display with a normal mode.

  Regarding the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 222, the change pattern 223, and the change pattern 224, respectively. The change pattern 222 indicates that the notice target hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, and the notice target hold display is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of one shift, and the notice target target display is not changed at the final shift timing. The change pattern 223 changes the hold display to the first specific mode (hammer), and the change pattern 223 displays the hold display for the notice target in the normal form at the time of starting winning, and then holds the notice target at the timing of one shift. This is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the first specific mode (hammer), and the hold display of the notification target is not changed in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift. After displaying the hold display in the first specific mode (hammer), the hold display for the notice target is displayed in the first specific mode (c) at the timing of one shift. Without change from the mer), at the timing of the final shift is without changing the change pattern of the first specific embodiment (hammer) to hold display notice object.

  As shown in FIG. 11-10 (J), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the display result is “out of” (that is, the display result). When the display result specified by the specification command is “out of”, the change pattern 222 becomes 20%, the change pattern 223 becomes 20%, and the change pattern 224 becomes 60%. When the result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the change pattern 222 becomes 40% and the change pattern 223 becomes 30%. , The change pattern 224 becomes 30%.

  In the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 225, the change pattern 226, the change pattern 227, the change pattern 228, the change pattern 229, and the change pattern 230, respectively. The change pattern 225 displays the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of one shift, The change pattern 226 is a change pattern that changes the hold display to the second specific mode (sword). The change pattern 226 displays the hold display for the notice target in the normal form at the time of starting winning, and then holds the notice target at the timing of one shift. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the display is changed to the first specific mode (hammer), and the hold display of the notification target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. After displaying the hold display in the normal mode, change the hold display for the advance notice to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of one shift, and the timing of the final shift Is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the advance notice target in the second specific form (sword), and the change pattern 228 displays the hold display of the advance notice object in the first specific form (hammer) at the time of starting winning a prize, It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific form (sword) at the timing of the final shift without changing the hold display of the notice object in the first specific form (hammer) at the timing of the first shift. The change pattern 229 changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific form (sword) at the timing of one shift after displaying the hold display of the notice object in the first specific form (hammer) at the time of starting winning. , A change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift, and the change pattern 230 After the stop display is displayed in the second specific mode (sword), the hold display for the notice target is not changed in the second specific form (sword) at the timing of the first shift, and the notice target is held at the timing of the final shift. It is a change pattern which does not change a display with a 2nd specific aspect (sword).

  As shown in FIG. 11-10 (J), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the display result is “out of” (that is, the display result). When the display result designated by the designation command is “out”, the change pattern 225 becomes 5%, the change pattern 226 becomes 10%, the change pattern 227 becomes 5%, and 25 % Change pattern 228, 25% change pattern 229, 30% change pattern 230, and the display result is “big hit” (ie, the display result specified by the display result specifying command) Is a “big hit”), the change pattern 225 becomes 25%, and the change pattern 226 becomes 19%. Ri, next change pattern 227 at a rate of 25%, next change pattern 228 at a rate of 13%, next change pattern 229 at a rate of 13%, a changing pattern 230 at a rate of 5%.

  When the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area is “4”, the effect control CPU 120 displays a hold display for four holds shown in FIG. 11-11 (K). Select the change pattern determination table.

  As shown in FIG. 11-11 (K), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the first change suggestion effect (no weapon), the determination result at the time of starting winning (designation command) The change pattern 231 is displayed at a rate of 100% regardless of the display result designated by (1). The change pattern 231 indicates that the notice target hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and the notice target hold display is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the second shift. Is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the notice target in the normal mode at the timing of the final shift.

  Regarding the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) Accordingly, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 232, the change pattern 233, the change pattern 234, and the change pattern 235, respectively. The change pattern 232 displays the hold display for the advance notice in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and does not change the hold display for the advance notice in the normal mode at the timing of the one-time shift. Is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the first specific form (hammer) at the timing of the final shift without changing the hold display of the normal form, and the change pattern 233 is the hold of the notice target at the start winning prize After the display is displayed in the normal mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first shift, and the hold display of the target of the notification is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the two shifts. The change pattern is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift, and the change pattern 2 4. After displaying the hold display for the advance notice in the normal mode at the time of starting winning, the hold display for the advance notice is changed to the first specific form (hammer) at the timing of one shift, and the advance notice is made at the timing of the second shift. The change display 235 is a change pattern that does not change the hold display of the object in the first specific mode (hammer) and does not change the hold display of the notice target in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the final shift. After displaying the hold display for the advance notice in the first specific mode (hammer) at the start winning prize, the hold display for the advance notice remains unchanged in the first specific form (hammer) at the timing of one shift and is shifted twice. The hold display for the notice target is not changed in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the first specific mode (hammer) without changing the hold display for the advance notice at the timing of the final shift. ) Is still does not change change the pattern of.

  As shown in FIG. 11-11 (K), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the display result is “out of” (that is, the display result). When the display result designated by the designation command is “out of”, the change pattern 232 is formed at a rate of 20%, the change pattern 233 is formed at a rate of 20%, and the change pattern 234 is formed at a rate of 20%. When the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the change pattern 232 becomes 30%. 30% change pattern 233, 30% change pattern 234 change 10% change pattern 235 to become.

  Regarding the case where the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the determination result at the time of starting winning (the display result specified by the symbol designating command, out of place or jackpot) In response to the change pattern 236, the change pattern 237, the change pattern 238, the change pattern 239, the change pattern 240, the change pattern 241, the change pattern 242, the change pattern 243, the change pattern 244, and the change pattern 245, respectively. A value has been allocated. The change pattern 236 indicates that the notice target hold display is displayed in the normal mode at the time of the start winning prize, and the notice target hold display is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the one-time shift, and the notice target is displayed at the timing of the second shift. Is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific form (sword) at the timing of the last shift without changing the normal hold display of the normal form. After the display is displayed in the normal mode, the hold display of the notice target is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first shift, and the hold display of the target of the notification is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the two shifts. The change pattern is a change pattern that changes the hold display to be notified to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. After displaying the hold display for the advance notice in the normal mode, the hold display for the advance notice is not changed in the normal mode at the timing of the first shift. (Sword) is a change pattern that does not change the notice target hold display at the timing of the final shift and does not change the second specific mode (sword), and the change pattern 239 displays the notice target hold display at the start winning prize. After displaying in the normal mode, the hold display for the advance notice is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the first shift, and the hold display for the advance notice is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the second shift. The change pattern 240 is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift without changing, and the change pattern 240 is at the time of the start winning prize After displaying the hold display for the advance notice in the normal mode, the hold display for the advance notice is changed to the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the first shift, and the hold display for the advance notice is displayed at the timing of the second shift. 2 is a change pattern that is changed to a specific mode (sword) and does not change the hold display of the notice target at the timing of the final shift, and remains unchanged in the second specific form (sword). Is displayed in the normal mode, and the hold display for the notice target is changed to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the first shift, and the hold display of the target for notification is changed to the second specific mode (sword at the timing of the second shift. ) Is not changed, and the hold display to be notified is not changed in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. After the notification target hold display is displayed in the first specific mode (hammer), the notice target hold display remains unchanged in the first specific mode (hammer) at the timing of the first shift, and at the timing of the second shift. It is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the advance notice target to the second specific form (sword) at the timing of the final shift without changing the hold display of the advance notice target in the first specific form (hammer). After displaying the hold display for the advance notice in the first specific mode (hammer) at the start winning prize, the hold display for the advance notice remains unchanged in the first specific form (hammer) at the timing of one shift and is shifted twice. A change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the time and does not change the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the final shift. The change pattern 244 displays the hold display of the notice target in the first specific mode (hammer) at the time of winning the start, and then displays the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of one shift. Change to the second specific mode (sword) at the timing of the second shift, and change the hold display of the previous notification target to the second specific mode (sword) at the final shift timing. The change pattern 245 is a change pattern 245 that displays the hold display of the notice target in the second specific mode (sword) at the time of the start winning prize, and then displays the hold display of the notification target in the second specific mode (at the timing of one shift) ( (Sword) is not changed and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the second specific form at the timing of the second shift (sword), and the hold display of the notice object is changed to the second specific form (timing of the final shift). ) Is still does not change change the pattern of.

  As shown in FIG. 11-11 (K), when the first change suggestion effect determined in step S04TM1040 is the third change suggestion effect (sword), the display result is “out of” (that is, the display result). When the display result designated by the designation command is “out of”, the change pattern 236 becomes 3%, the change pattern 237 becomes 7%, and the change pattern 238 becomes 3%. % Change pattern 239, 7% change pattern 240, 3% change pattern 241, 15% change pattern 242, 15% change pattern 243, 15% change pattern 241 % Change pattern 244 and 25% change pattern 245 when the display result is “big hit” ( In other words, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “big hit”, the change pattern 236 becomes 15%, the change pattern 237 becomes 10%, and the change pattern 238 becomes 15%. Then, the change pattern 239 is formed at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 240 is formed at a rate of 10%, the change pattern 241 is formed at a rate of 15%, the change pattern 242 is formed at a rate of 8%, and the change pattern 243 is formed at a rate of 8%. Thus, the change pattern 244 becomes a rate of 8%, and the change pattern 245 becomes a rate of 1%.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-11, a change in which the display mode of the hold display changes from a change pattern in which the display mode of the hold display does not change (in this example, the change pattern 230, the change pattern 245, etc.). The pattern (in this example, the change pattern 225, the change pattern 239, etc.) has a higher expectation degree for jackpot. In addition, a change pattern in which the display mode of the hold display changes by one step by one shift (in this example, from the normal mode to the first specific mode (change pattern 226, change pattern 240, etc.), or from the first specific mode to the first specific mode. Change pattern in which the display mode of the hold display changes in two steps with a single shift (in this example, the second specific pattern is changed from the normal mode to the second specific mode). The big hit expectation degree is higher in the aspect (change pattern that changes to change pattern 227, change pattern 241 and the like).

  Thus, when the hold display is a change pattern that does not change from the normal mode (change pattern 201, change pattern 211, change pattern 221, change pattern 231), the first change suggestion effect is the first change suggestion effect ( Change pattern (change pattern 201, change pattern 211, change pattern 221, and change) in which the hold display finally becomes the first specific mode (hammer) or the second specific mode (sword) In the case of a change pattern other than the pattern 231, the first change suggestion effect is determined as the second change suggestion effect (hammer) or the third change suggestion effect (sword). As described above, since the ratio of changing the display mode of the operation-related display in the order of the first change suggestion effect <the second change suggestion effect <the third change suggestion effect is high, the display mode of the hold display is The rate of change in the display mode of the action-related display is higher in the case of change than in the case where the display mode of the hold display is not changed. According to such a configuration, the interest can be improved by relating the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the operation related display.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second change suggestion effect. If it is not decided to execute the second change suggestion effect (NO in step S04TM1060), the process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined to perform the second change suggestion effect (YES in step S04TM1060), the effect control CPU 120 sets the second change suggestion effect effect mode to the second change suggestion effect determination table (FIG. 11). -9 (G)) (step S04TM1070), and the process is terminated as it is.

  FIG. 11-9 (G) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the second change suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 11-9 (G), in this embodiment, a plurality of change suggestion effects (first change suggestions) are provided for each of the change patterns of the motion-related display (change patterns determined in step S04TM1020). A determination value for deciding which change suggestion effect is executed among the effect, the second change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect) is assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 11-9 (G), when the change pattern of the motion-related display determined in step S04TM1020 is the change pattern 103, the first change suggesting effect is produced at a rate of 80%, and 20% It becomes the second change suggestion effect at a rate of 0%, becomes the third change suggestion effect, and in the case of the change pattern 112, it becomes the first change suggestion effect at a rate of 35%, and the second change at a rate of 40%. When the change pattern 113 is a change pattern 113, the change suggestion effect becomes a first change suggestion effect at a rate of 90%, and becomes a second change suggestion effect at a rate of 10%. If the change pattern 122 is the change pattern 122, the change suggestion effect is 20%, the first change suggestion effect is 35%, the second change suggestion effect is 35%, and 45%. In the case of the change pattern 123, the first change suggestion effect is generated at a rate of 35%, the second change suggestion effect is set at a rate of 40%, and the third change suggestion is set at a rate of 25%. In the case of the change pattern 124, the change suggests a first change suggestion effect at a rate of 95%, a second change suggestion effect at a rate of 5%, and a third change suggestion effect at a rate of 0%. In the case of 132, when it is a change pattern 133, it becomes a first change suggestion effect at a rate of 5%, becomes a second change suggestion effect at a rate of 25%, becomes a third change suggestion effect at a rate of 70%. Is a first change suggesting effect at a rate of 20%, a second change suggesting effect at a rate of 35%, a third change suggesting effect at a rate of 45%, and in the case of the change pattern 134, 35% First in proportion Becomes of suggested effect, become the second change suggested directing at the rate of 40%, a third change suggested directing at the rate of 25%.

  As described above, also in the second change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect has a higher rate of change in the display state of the motion-related display than the first change suggestion effect, and the third change suggestion effect is third. The change suggestion effect has a higher rate of change in the display mode of the motion related display. When the first change suggesting effect or the second change suggesting effect is executed, the display mode of the operation related display may not change, while when the third change suggesting effect is executed, the operation related display is displayed. The aspect is always changing. As described above, when the display mode of the motion-related display is changed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the display mode of the motion-related display is not changed. Therefore, the first change suggesting effect <the second change suggesting effect <the first The expectation level for jackpots increases in the order of the 3 changes suggestion. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the teammate character appears again (whether or not the second change suggestion effect is executed). Furthermore, when an ally character appears again (when the second change suggestion effect is executed), pay attention to the type of item that the ally character has (type of change suggestion effect: no weapon, hammer, sword) become. Thereby, the interest of change suggestion production can be improved.

(Direction decision processing at the start of fluctuation)
The CPU 103, when starting the variation display of the special symbol, displays a display result designation command for designating a display result, a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation). Command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120.

  The CPU 120 for effect control uses a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first hold symbol) to specify that the reserved memory number has been subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is started. Memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command), display result designation command for designating a display result (a jackpot type in the case of a big hit or disappointment or a big jackpot), a special symbol change time, and a production content The special symbol variation display is executed based on the fact that one set of commands, such as a variation pattern designation command for designating reach and pseudo-ream), is received from the game control microcomputer 100, and the special symbol is displayed. The change time and production contents (reach, pseudo-ream, etc.) can be specified. The effect control CPU 120 receives the special symbol (first special symbol) based on the fact that the special symbol designation command is received from the game control microcomputer 100 when the special symbol variation display is finished and the display result is finalized. It is possible to specify that the display result is derived after the variable display of the symbol or the second special symbol) is terminated.

  FIG. 11-12 is a flowchart illustrating a change start time effect determination process. The effect control CPU 120 executes the change start effect determination process in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in FIG. Specifically, when receiving the one set of commands accompanying the start of the special symbol variation display, the effect control CPU 120 designates the decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the special symbol variation display as the display result designation. An effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) to be executed based on the command and the variation pattern designation command is set, and the decorative design based on the designated variation pattern is set. The effect to be executed during the change display is determined by the change start effect determination process shown in FIG.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second change suggestion effect. If it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect (YES in step S04TM2000), the process proceeds to step S04TM2010, and if it is not decided to execute the second change suggestion effect (NO in step S04TM2000). The process proceeds to step S04TM2040.

  If it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect (YES in step S04TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 executes a first SU (step up) notice effect and a second SU (step up) notice effect described later. Presence / absence is determined based on the execution notice determination table (see FIG. 11-13 (L)) of the SU notice effect (step S04TM2010).

  The first SU (step-up) notice effect can be developed in stages from the first stage (step 1) to the second stage (step 2). This is an effect in which the degree of expectation for the big hit is higher than that in the case of finishing in one stage (step 1). In the first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11), the whole body of the ally character is displayed in a small window in the screen, and the second stage ( In step 2), as shown in FIG. 11-19 (21), the upper body of the enlarged teammate character is displayed in a large window on the screen. Further, when the first SU notice effect is executed, when a predetermined final stage (first stage or second stage) is reached, a predetermined dialogue (FIG. 11-19 (21 "Chance" shown in ()).

  On the other hand, the second SU (step-up) notice effect is determined to develop from the first stage (step 1) to the second stage (step 2). This is an effect related to the second change suggestion effect. In the first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11), the whole body of the ally character is displayed in a small window on the screen, and the second stage ( In step 2), as shown in FIG. 11-17 (12), the enlarged teammate character pops out from the large window on the screen, and then performs the second change suggestion effect. The mode of the teammate character that jumps out of the window in this second stage (step 2) is a mode related to the second change suggestion effect to be executed later, and (i) the type of the second change suggestion effect is If the first change suggestion effect (no weapon) is determined, a friend character who does not have a weapon jumps out of the window, and then the first change suggestion effect (no weapon) is executed, and (ii) 2 When the type of the change suggestion effect is determined to be the second change suggestion effect (hammer), the teammate character with the hammer jumps out of the window, and then the second change suggestion effect (hammer) is executed. , (Iii) If the type of the second change suggestion effect is determined to be the third change suggestion effect (sword), a teammate character with a sword jumps out of the window , Then the third change suggested director (sword) is executed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11), the first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect and the first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect are common effects. . Accordingly, the first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect is finished and a predetermined dialogue (“chance”) is displayed without moving to the second stage (step 2), or the second stage (step 2). ), The player cannot grasp that the first SU notice effect is being executed instead of the second SU notice effect. Also, until the second stage (step 2) after the first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect is completed, the player is informed that the second SU notice effect has been executed instead of the first SU notice effect. Can not grasp. Therefore, at the time of the first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect and the time of the first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect, the player can produce either the first SU notice effect or the second SU notice effect. Will be interested in whether or not is being executed, and will pay attention to the transition of the subsequent production.

  That is, in a state where the teammate character is displayed in the small window (a state in which the common production mode is set), the player displays the enlarged teammate character in the next large window (first SU notice) The expectation that the second stage of the effect (step 2) is executed) and the expectation that the character jumps out of the window (the second stage of the second SU notice effect (step 2) is executed) are combined. Thus, a player's expectation can be maintained by providing a plurality of development patterns from a common performance mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-13 (L), in this embodiment, determination values are assigned so that the execution rate of the SU notice effect varies depending on the display result. When the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect at a rate of 20%. The second SU notice effect is determined to be executed at the rate of%, and it is determined that neither the first SU notice effect nor the second SU notice effect is executed at the rate of 70%. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect at a rate of 30%. The second SU notice effect is determined to be executed at a rate of 50%, and it is determined that neither of the first SU notice effect and the second SU notice effect is executed at a rate of 20%.

  As described above, when it is determined to execute the second change suggestion effect, in step S04TM2010, whether or not the first SU (step up) notice effect and the second SU (step up) notice effect are executed, The determination is made based on the execution table for determining whether or not to execute the SU notice effect (see FIG. 11-13 (L)). If it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect here, the first SU notice effect and the second SU When it is decided not to execute any notice effect of the notice effect, that is, when it is decided not to execute the second SU notice effect even though it is decided to execute the second change suggestion effect. Shows a teammate character from the right side of the screen at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing before the reach state is established), as in the first change suggestion effect. It is assumed that the second change suggestion effect is executed. In the second change suggestion effect executed in this case, (i) if the type of the second change suggestion effect is determined to be the first change suggestion effect (no weapon), the ally who does not have a weapon The character appears from the right side of the screen, and then the first change suggestion effect (no weapon) is executed. (Ii) The type of the second change suggestion effect is determined as the second change suggestion effect (hammer). In this case, a teammate character with a hammer appears from the right side of the screen, and then the second change suggestion effect (hammer) is executed. (Iii) The type of the second change suggestion effect is the third change suggestion effect. If it is determined to be (sword), a teammate character with a sword appears from the right side of the screen, and then a third change suggesting effect (sword) is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first SU notice effect. If it is determined to execute the first SU notice effect (YES in step S04TM2020), the effect form of the first SU notice effect is selected as the effect form of the first SU notice effect (see FIG. 11-13 (N)). (Step S04TM2030). On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for effect control determines not to execute the first SU notice effect (NO in step S04TM2020), the process directly proceeds to step S04TM2070.

  FIG. 11-13 (N) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode determination table for the first SU notice effect. As shown in FIG. 11-13 (N), in this embodiment, according to the display result, one of the “first stage” and “second stage” effects is used as the final step of the first SU notice effect. Determination values can be determined, and a determination value is assigned to each of these effects.

  As shown in FIG. 11-13 (N), when the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “out”), the first SU notice effect is produced. The mode (final step) becomes the “first stage” at a rate of 70% and becomes the “second stage” at a rate of 30%. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the effect mode (final step) of the first SU notice effect is 10%. The ratio is “first stage”, and the ratio is 90% “second stage”.

  If it is not decided to execute the second change suggestion effect (NO in step S04TM2000), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the first SU (step-up) notice effect is executed, and whether or not the SU notice effect is executed. A decision is made based on the decision table (see FIG. 11-13 (M)) (step S04TM2040).

  As shown in FIG. 11-13 (M), in this embodiment, the determination values are assigned so that the execution rate of the SU notice effect varies depending on the display result. When the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result specifying command is “out”), it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect at a rate of 30%. The first SU notice effect is determined not to be executed at a rate of%. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect at a rate of 80%. The first SU notice effect is not executed at a rate of 20%.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first SU notice effect. If it is decided to execute the first SU notice effect (YES in step S04TM2050), the effect form of the first SU notice effect is selected as the effect form of the first SU notice effect (see FIG. 11-13 (N)). (Step S04TM2060). On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for effect control determines not to execute the first SU notice effect (NO in step S04TM2050), the process directly proceeds to step S04TM2070.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in notice effect and the effect mode based on the cut-in notice effect determination table (see FIG. 11-13 (O)) (step S04TM2070), and performs the processing as it is. finish.

  The cut-in notice effect in the present embodiment is a notice effect that is executed immediately after the reach state is established, and the effect control CPU 120 is determined in advance when it is determined to execute the cut-in notice effect. At the same time (immediately after the reach state is established), the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed (see FIG. 11-17 (15)). Then, when the push sensor detects that the push button 04TM102B is operated, the cut-in notice effect of the aspect determined in step S04TM1070 is executed.

  FIG. 11-13 (O) is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a cut-in notice effect determination table. As shown in FIG. 11-13 (O), in this embodiment, the determination value is assigned so that the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect varies depending on the display result. When the display result is “out of” (that is, when the display result specified by the display result designation command is “out”), the effect mode of the cut-in notice effect (the character of the cut-in image) is 30%. The first mode is “CHANCE ??” at the rate of 10%, and the second mode is “CHANCE!” At the rate of 10%, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed at the rate of 60%. On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” (that is, when the determination result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit”), the production mode of the cut-in notice effect (the character of the cut-in image) is The first mode is “CHANCE ??” at a rate of 5%, the second mode is “CHANCE!” At a rate of 65%, and the cut-in notice effect is not executed at a rate of 30%.

(Specific example when the change suggestion effect is executed twice)
Next, specific examples in the case where the change suggesting effect is executed twice will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14, 11-15, 11-16, and 11-17. FIG. 11-14 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the change suggesting effect is executed twice. FIGS. 11-15, 11-16, and 11-17 show the change suggesting effect of 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it performs twice.

  In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the display result designated by the display result designation command is “big hit” and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is “super reach big hit”. In addition, the display of the decorative symbols is performed, and a battle effect in which the teammate character and the enemy character battle is executed as a super reach effect. Then, the occurrence of a big hit is notified by executing a victory effect in which the teammate character finally wins.

  In step S04TM1010, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode of the motion-related display is the second special mode [crack (medium)] in the change suggestion effect determination process, and in step S04TM1020, the motion-related The display change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 123 (normal → crack (small) → crack (medium)), and the first change suggestion effect is set as the third change suggestion effect (sword) in step S04TM1040. In step S04TM1050, it is determined that the change pattern of the hold display is the change pattern 226 (normal → hammer → sword). In step S04TM1070, the second change suggestion effect is the second change suggestion effect (hammer). It has been decided to.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the second SU notice effect in step S04TM2010 in the change start effect determination process. Decide to run. Below, the example at the time of determining to perform twice change suggestion production is shown to FIGS. 11-15, 11-16, and FIGS. 11-17.

  First, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (1), the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area of the image display device 5 with the first reserved memory number being two. In 5R, the decorative pattern variation display (variation display started at the timing of T1 shown in FIGS. 11-14) is executed. In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, the normal mode motion-related display 04TM001 (sphere image without cracks) is displayed, and in the hold display area 04TM004, two hold modes 04TM002 in the normal mode (round) are displayed. ing.

  In this embodiment, the aspect of the sphere button 04TM102A is shown at the lower right of the effect diagram in association with the effect diagram. When the effect image shown in FIG. 11-15 (1) is displayed on the image display device 5, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (2), with the first reserved memory number being 2, the symbol display area 5L, symbol display area 5C, and symbol display area of the image display device 5. In 5R, when the decorative symbol variation display is executed (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 11-14), a new winning for the winning ball device 6A occurs and the first reserved memory number becomes 3. Shall be. The effect control CPU 120 newly displays the hold display 04TM002 in the hold display area 04TM004 based on the reception of the command indicating that the first hold storage number has increased. In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 in the normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (3), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5 </ b> L of the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved memory number is 3 and the symbol display. The decorative symbol “4” is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol “6” is stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped. The special effect area 04TM003 displays the normal operation related display 04TM001, and the hold display area 04TM004 displays three hold displays 04TM002. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (4) (at the timing of T3 shown in FIG. 11-14), the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 as a special effect one by one. The display is shifted to the area 04TM003 side, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode displayed at the position closest to the special effect area 04TM003 is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 side and deleted. At this time, when the shifted hold display 04TM002 overlaps with the motion-related display 04TM001, the hold display 04TM002 is erased, so that the player sees whether the normal-type hold display 04TM002 is absorbed in the motion-related display 04TM001. looks like.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (4) (at timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-14), the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol of the image display device 5. In the display area 5R, when the decorative symbol variation display is started, based on the hold display change pattern 226, the notice target hold display 04TM002 is changed from the normal mode to the first specific mode (in this example, round to hammer type). ). As a result, in the hold display area 04TM004, a normal mode (round shape) hold display 04TM002 and a first specific mode (hammer type) hold display 04TM002 are displayed. In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (a spherical image without cracks) in a normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (5), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “3” in the symbol display area 5 </ b> L of the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved memory number is 2 and the symbol display. The decorative symbol “2” is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol “5” is stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped. The special effect area 04TM003 displays a normal mode motion-related display 04TM001, and the hold display area 04TM004 displays a normal mode hold display 04TM002 and a first specific mode hold display 04TM002. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (6) (at the timing of T4 shown in FIG. 11-14), the effect control CPU 120 displays the hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 as a special effect one by one. The display is shifted to the area 04TM003 side, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode displayed at the position closest to the special effect area 04TM003 is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 side and deleted.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (6) (at timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-14), the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol of the image display device 5. In the display area 5R, when the decorative symbol variation display is started, the notice target hold display 04TM002 is changed from the first specific form to the second specific form (in this example, the hammer shape) based on the change pattern 226 of the hold display. From the image of sword to the image of a sword. As a result, the hold display area 04TM004 displays the hold display 04TM002 of the second specific form (sword shape). In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (a spherical image without cracks) in a normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (7), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “4” and the symbol display in the symbol display area 5 L of the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved memory number is 1. The decorative symbol “2” is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol “6” is stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped. In addition, the special effect area 04TM003 displays a normal mode operation-related display 04TM001, and the hold display area 04TM004 displays a hold display 04TM002 of the second specific mode. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (8) (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-14), the effect control CPU 120 displays one hold display 04TM002 displayed in the hold display area 04TM004 as one special effect area. The display is shifted to the 04TM003 side, and the next variable display is started in the image display device 5.

  In this shift display, the hold display 04TM002 in the second specific mode (sword shape) is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 side and deleted. At this time, when the shifted hold display 04TM002 overlaps with the motion-related display 04TM001, the hold display 04TM002 is erased, so that the player has the second specific mode (sword-shaped) hold display 04TM002 as motion-related. It appears as if it was absorbed in the display 04TM001.

  Here, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (8) (at timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-14), the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol of the image display device 5. In the display area 5R, the decorative pattern variation display is started. In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (a spherical image without cracks) in a normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the third change suggesting effect when the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 11-15 (9), the first change suggestion effect at a predetermined timing from the start of the fluctuation (at the timing of T6 shown in FIG. 11-14) As a result, the third change suggesting effect is executed. In the present embodiment, along with the start of the third change suggestion effect, a teammate character 04TM010C with a sword appears from the right side of the screen. At this time, in the special effect area 04TM003, the motion related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (10) (at the timing of T7 shown in FIG. 11-14), the teammate character 04TM010C that has appeared appears in response to the normal motion-related display 04TM001 (a sphere image without cracks). Do the action of cutting with a sword. As described above, as a result of the effect that the teammate character 04TM010C acts on the motion-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode, the change pattern 123 ([crack (small)] ] At the end of the first change suggestion effect, the motion-related display 04TM001 changes from the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) to the first special mode (spherical image with small cracks). (FIG. 11-16 (11)). At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state) even after the end of the first change suggestion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 11-16 (11) (at the timing T8 shown in FIG. 11-14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the third change suggesting effect (erasing the teammate character 04TM010C that has performed the action with the sword). And the first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect is started based on the decision to execute the second SU notice effect. In the present embodiment, when the first stage (step 1) of the second SU notice effect is started, a small window is displayed at the upper center of the image display device 5, and an ally character is displayed in the small window.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the second change suggestion effect when the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. Based on the decision to be made, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (12) (timing T9 shown in FIG. 11-14), the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice effect is started. . In the present embodiment, when the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice effect is started, a window larger than the first stage is displayed at the upper center of the image display device 5, and a friend with a hammer from the window. Character 04TM010B pops out, and the second change suggestion effect is started as the second change suggestion effect.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (13) (at the timing of T11 shown in FIG. 11-14), the teammate character 04TM010B that has entered the action related display 04TM001 (small cracks appear in the first special mode). An action of hitting a sphere with a hammer. As described above, as a result of the effect that the teammate character 04TM010B acts on the motion-related display 04TM001 (spherical image with small cracks) in the first special mode, the change pattern 123 (the second change suggesting effect [ (Middle)] at the end of the second change suggestion effect, the motion-related display 04TM001 changes from the first special mode (spherical image with small cracks) to the second special mode (medium crack). It changes to a spherical image with a crack (FIG. 11-17 (14)). That is, the crack included in the motion related display 04TM001 is enlarged. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state) even after the end of the second change suggestion effect.

  As shown in FIG. 11-17 (14), the effect control CPU 120 ends the second change suggestion effect (erase the friendly character 04TM010C that has performed the action with the hammer) and establishes the reach state in the variation pattern. At the timing to be reached, the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 are stopped by displaying the decorative symbol “7”, and the reach state is set. It is displayed (timing T12 in FIG. 11-14).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (15), the effect control CPU 120 stops the display of the decorative symbol “7” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, and thereby reaches the reach state. In an ongoing state (at the timing of T13 shown in FIGS. 11-14), an operation promotion display 04TM030 for prompting the player to operate the push button 04TM102B is displayed. The operation promotion display 04TM030 includes an image simulating the push button 04TM102B and a downward arrow displayed above the image simulating the push button 04TM102B. The display prompting the user to press the push button 04TM102B. It has become. The first operation promotion display displayed here is an operation promotion display corresponding to the cut-in notice effect. In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (a sphere image having a medium crack) in the second special mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (16), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the push button 04TM102B when the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed (T14 shown in FIG. 11-14). The cut-in notice effect of the second mode is executed, and the cut-in image 01TM040 (“CHANCE !!”) is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (a sphere image having a medium crack) in the second special mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the cut-in notice effect, and executes the battle effect according to the change pattern of the super reach as shown in FIG. 11-17 (17). Here, with the execution of the battle effect, the teammate character 04TM010 and the enemy character 04TM015 are displayed on the image display device 5 (timing T15 in FIG. 11-14). In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (a sphere image having a medium crack) in the second special mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (18) (step T16 in FIG. 11-14), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute display control of the battle effect corresponding to the variation pattern. During this period, display control relating to the middle part of the battle effect (effect image in which the teammate character 04TM010 is jumping toward the enemy character 04TM015) is continuously executed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect image to be superimposed and displayed on the motion related display 04TM001 (spherical image having a moderate crack) displayed in the special effect area 04TM003. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the fact that the motion-related display 04TM001 is shining. As described above, the effect image is displayed on the motion related display 04TM001 during the period in which the display control of the battle effect is continuously performed in the image display device 5, thereby causing the player to pay attention to the motion related display 04TM001. , Can make you expect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (19) (step T17 in FIG. 11-14), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute display control of the battle effect corresponding to the variation pattern. Thus, the operation related display 04TM001 in the second special mode with the effect image is erased from the special effect area 04TM003, and an operation promotion display for prompting the player to operate the spherical button 04TM102A is displayed at the center of the screen. The operation promotion display displayed at this time is a display mode reflecting the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 that has been displayed (immediately before erasure), and is larger than the motion related display 04TM001 (with a display range). Since it is displayed at the center of the screen, it is more visible to the player than the action-related display 04TM001. The operation promotion display displayed at this time is an image that imitates the shape of the sphere button 04TM102A, and includes the characters “one blow !!”, so that the player can easily operate the sphere button 04TM102A once. It is possible to grasp.

  In the present embodiment, special operation promotion display 04TM035, first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, and third operation promotion display for prompting the player to operate the sphere button 04TM102A. Special operation promotion display 04TM035C.

  The special operation promotion display 04TM035 is an operation promotion display corresponding to the motion-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode, and simulates the sphere button 04TM102A in the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed). It is made up of images. When the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 does not change the spherical button 04TM102A in the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are in the fully closed state).

  The first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is an operation promotion display corresponding to the motion-related display 04TM001 (sphere image with small cracks) in the first special mode, and the first special mode (split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are slightly opened). In the image of the spherical button 04TM102A. When the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed, the production control CPU 120 changes the sphere button 04TM102A from the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) to the first special mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are slightly changed). Open).

  The second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is an operation promotion display corresponding to the motion-related display 04TM001 (spherical image with moderate cracks) in the second special mode, and the second special mode (split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are in the middle). In a state of being open to the extent) an image simulating the spherical button 04TM102A. When the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is displayed, the production control CPU 120 changes the sphere button 04TM102A from the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) to the second special mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are medium). To the open state).

  The third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is an operation promotion display corresponding to the motion-related display 04TM001 (spherical image with large cracks) of the third special mode, and the third special mode (split hemispheres 04TM141A, 04TM141B is maximized). It consists of an image simulating the spherical button 04TM102A in the open state. When the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is displayed, the production control CPU 120 changes the sphere button 04TM102A from the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) to the third special mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are the maximum). To the open state).

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-17 (19), the display mode of the operation-related display 04TM001 that has been displayed (immediately before erasure) was the second special mode (a sphere image with a moderate crack). Thus, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B simulating the spherical button 04TM102A in the second special mode (the state in which the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are opened moderately) is displayed. When the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 changes the sphere button 04TM102A from the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A, 04TM141B are fully closed) to the second special mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A, 04TM141B). Change to a moderately open state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (20), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A in the second special mode when the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is displayed. At the timing of T18 shown in FIG. 11-14, a combination of decorative symbols (in this example, “777”) whose display result is a big hit is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the teammate character 04TM010 executes a victory effect that wins the enemy character 04TM015, and displays the character “Victory! The light emitter 04TM103 and the rotating shaft 04TM131 are rotated at the same time. Thereby, the light emitted from the rotating light emitter 04TM103 is irradiated irregularly through the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B, and the fun at the time of occurrence of the big hit can be further improved.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the occurrence of the big hit by executing the victory effect in the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the sphere button 04TM102A in response to the operation promotion display, and the sphere button The occurrence of a big hit is notified by further changing the mode of 04TM102A according to the operation (by simultaneously rotating the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotating shaft 04TM131).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the gaming control microcomputer 100 at the timing of T19 shown in FIGS. The combination of decorative symbols ("777") is confirmed and stopped, and the sphere button 04TM102A is changed from the second special mode (the state where the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are opened moderately) to the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are all open). (Closed state). Thereby, the variation display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot is completed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display 04TM002 and the mode of the first change suggestion effect are related, and in the first change suggestion effect, Appears with an item corresponding to the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display 04TM002 (no hold if the hold display is round, hammer if hammered, sword if sword shaped) An effect of performing an action on the display 04TM001 is executed. As described above, the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 and the change suggestion effect mode are related, so that the player can determine whether or not the hold display 04TM002 is changed and whether the hold display 04TM002 is changed. Attention will be paid to the change pattern, and the interest of changing the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the change suggestion effect, the rate at which the display mode of the action-related display 04TM001 changes varies depending on the item that the teammate character that has appeared (the rate of change is [no weapon <hammer <sword ]). In other words, depending on the mode (type) of the change suggestion effect, the final mode of the motion related display 04TM001 is determined at a different rate. Therefore, a player pays attention to the item which the friend character who appeared appears, and can improve the interest of a change suggestion effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prompt the player to operate the final display mode of the motion-related display 04TM001 (normal mode, first special mode, second special mode, third special mode) and the spherical button 04TM102A. The operation promotion display modes (special operation promotion display 04TM035, first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, third special operation promotion display 04TM035C) correspond to each other. As a result, depending on the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display 04TM002, it is determined at a different ratio to which mode the operation promotion display that prompts the user to operate the spherical button 04TM102A. Specifically, when the display mode at the time of the final shift of the hold display 04TM002 is the normal mode, the case where the display mode is the first specific mode (hammer shape) or the second specific mode (sword shape) is related to the movement. The rate at which the display 04TM001 is displayed in any of the first special mode to the third special mode is high, and the rate at which any of the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A to the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is displayed as the operation promotion display. Is expensive. As described above, since the display mode of the hold display 04TM002 and the mode of the operation promotion display for prompting the player to operate the spherical button 04TM102A are related, the interest can be further improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, modes of operation promotion display for prompting the player to operate the sphere button 04TM102A (special operation promotion display 04TM035, first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, third The special operation promotion display 04TM035C) corresponds to the mode (form) of the actual spherical button 04TM102A. Specifically, the mode (form) of the sphere button 04TM102A is changed from the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) to the final operation promotion display mode (that is, the final motion related display mode). It changes to the mode (form) corresponding to. As described above, the sphere button 04TM102A, which is an actual operation unit, and the operation promotion display, which is an image simulating the sphere button 04TM102A displayed on the image display device 5, are associated with each other, thereby operating the sphere button 04TM102A. The interest of the production can be further improved.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11) and FIG. 11-17 (14), there are two timings when the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 changes. As shown in FIG. 11-16 (11), the change timing of the first action-related display 04TM001 is the timing immediately after the start of the variable display (timing T8 shown in FIG. 11-14), and the second action The change timing of the related display 04TM001 is the timing after the second stage (step 2) of the second SU notice effect is finished (timing T12 shown in FIG. 11-14). In this embodiment, the more the number of times the display mode of the motion-related display changes, the higher the final display mode of the motion-related display becomes a mode of high expectation of jackpot (at least a first special mode with one change, At least the second special mode is achieved by two changes). Therefore, by providing a change pattern in which there are a plurality of timings at which the display mode of the motion-related display changes within a single variable display period, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and improve interest. .

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-15 (8) to 11-17 (13), the motion related display 04TM001 is displayed before the reach state is established when the variable display is executed. Also in the period, it is displayed in the special effect area 04TM003. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (11), it is possible to change the display mode of the motion-related display 04TM001 at the timing before the reach state is established. According to such a configuration, with regard to the executed variation display, the interest in the operation related display 04TM001 is increased and the operation is performed within a period in which the expected degree of jackpot is not so high (timing before the reach state is established). The interest of the production using the related display 04TM001 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, as an effect of prompting the operation of the push button 04TM102B, an effect of displaying the operation promotion display 04TM030 (see FIG. 11-17 (15)) can be executed, and the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A is prompted. As effects, special operation promotion display 04TM035, first special operation promotion display 04TM035A (see FIG. 11-19 (25)), second special operation promotion display 04TM035B (see FIG. 11-17 (19)), and third An effect of displaying any of the special operation promotion display 04TM035C can be executed. Here, the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed immediately after the reach state is established, and when the push button 04TM102B is operated while the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed, the first mode (“CHANCE ??”) or The cut-in notice effect in the second mode (“CHANCE !!”) is executed. On the other hand, the special operation promotion display 04TM035, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C are executed during the execution of the super reach effect (battle effect) after the reach state is established. The spherical button 04TM102A is operated when any of the special operation promotion display 04TM035, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is displayed. In such a case, an effect image for informing the success or failure of the battle is displayed, and the display result is informed.

  Thus, while the cut-in notice effect exists as an operation effect executed by operating the push button 04TM102B in accordance with the operation promotion display (operation promotion display 04TM030), the operation promotion display (special operation promotion display) 04TM035, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, and the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C) as a manipulation effect executed by operating the spherical button 04TM102A. There is a notification effect of the winning / losing result (display result). In this embodiment, when the push button 04TM102B is operated, it is immediately after the reach state is established, and the fluctuation pattern is any one of “normal reach miss”, “super reach miss”, “normal reach big hit”, and “super reach big hit”. On the other hand, when the sphere button 04TM102A is operated, since it is displayed during the execution of the super reach production after the reach state is established, the variation patterns are “super reach off” and “super reach big hit”. There is a possibility that either.

  That is, when the push button 04TM102B is operated, there is a possibility that the process will be terminated by normal reach. On the other hand, when the sphere button 04TM102A is operated, it always develops to super reach. The big hit expectation is higher when the super-reach is developed than when the normal reach is finished. Therefore, the big hit expectation is higher when the spherical button 04TM102A is operated than when the push button 04TM102B is operated. As a result, the player is interested in which button of the push button 04TM102B and the ball button 04TM102A is to be operated (whether an operation promotion display corresponding to which button operation is displayed). It is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect.

  Further, as described above, the motion-related display and the operation promotion display related to the sphere button 04TM102A correspond to each other, and the operation promotion display related to the sphere button 04TM102A corresponds to the special operation promotion display 04TM035 <first special operation promotion display 04TM035A <second. The big hit expectation degree becomes higher in the order of special operation promotion display 04TM035B <third special operation promotion display 04TM035C. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether the motion-related display is in the normal mode, the first special mode, the second special mode, or the third special mode.

(Specific example of executing the change suggestion effect once)
Next, a specific example in which the change suggestion effect is executed once will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-17, 11-15, 11-16, and 11-19. FIG. 11-17 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the change suggestion effect is executed once. FIGS. 11-15, 11-16, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when it performs twice.

  In the example shown below, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the display result designated by the display result designation command is “out of” and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is “super reach out”. In addition, the display of the decorative symbols is performed, and a battle effect in which the teammate character and the enemy character battle is executed as a super reach effect. Then, it is notified that the display result is out of order by executing a defeat effect in which the teammate character eventually loses.

  In step S04TM1010, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the final display mode of the motion-related display is the first special mode [crack (small)] in the change suggestion stage determination process, and in step S04TM1020, the motion-related The display change pattern is determined to be the change pattern 111 (normal → crack (small)). In step S04TM1040, the first change suggestion effect is determined to be the third change suggestion effect (sword). In S04TM1050, the change pattern of the hold display is determined to be the change pattern 226 (normal → hammer → sword).

  Then, in step S04TM2040, the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the first SU notice effect (does not execute the second SU notice effect) in the variation start effect determination process, and in step S04TM2070, the cut-in notice effect. Decided not to run. Below, the example at the time of determining to perform one change suggestion production is shown to FIGS. 11-15, 11-16, and FIGS. 11-19.

  As described above, similar to the case where the change suggestion effect is executed twice, the effect control CPU 120 determines to use the first change suggestion effect as the third change suggestion effect (sword). Then, the third change suggesting effect is started (FIGS. 11-15 (9) and (10)). As a result of the execution of the third change suggestion effect, the motion-related display 04TM001 changes from the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) to the first special mode (spherical image with small cracks).

  As shown in FIG. 11-16 (11) (at the timing T8 shown in FIG. 11-18), the effect control CPU 120 ends the third change suggesting effect (erasing the teammate character 04TM010C that has performed the action with the sword). And the first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect is started based on the decision to execute the first SU notice effect. In the present embodiment, when the first stage (step 1) of the first SU notice effect is started, a small window is displayed at the upper center of the image display device 5, and an ally character is displayed in the small window. In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (sphere image with small cracks) of the first special mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, the CPU 120 for effect control performs FIG. 11-19 (21) when executing the variable display of the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 11 (at the timing of T9 shown in FIG. 11-18), the second stage (step 2) of the first SU notice effect is started. In the present embodiment, when the second stage (step 2) of the first SU notice effect is started, a window larger than the first stage is displayed at the upper center of the image display device 5, and the ally character and “ The word “chance” is displayed. In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (sphere image with small cracks) of the first special mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  As shown in FIG. 11-19 (22), the effect control CPU 120 ends the first SU notice effect (deletes the window, the ally character displayed in the window, and the character “chance”). At the timing when the reach state in the variation pattern is to be established, the reach state is established by stopping the display of the decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5L and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5, and the upper part of the image display device 5 Is displayed with the character “reach!” (Timing T11 in FIG. 11-18). In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (sphere image with small cracks) of the first special mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (23), the effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect according to the super reach variation pattern. Here, with the execution of the battle effect, the teammate character 04TM010 and the enemy character 04TM015 are displayed on the image display device 5 (timing T12 in FIG. 11-18). In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (sphere image with small cracks) of the first special mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (24) (at timing T13 in FIG. 11-18), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute display control of the battle effect corresponding to the variation pattern. During this period, display control relating to the middle part of the battle effect (effect image in which the teammate character 04TM010 is jumping toward the enemy character 04TM015) is continuously executed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect image to be superimposed and displayed on the motion related display 04TM001 (spherical image with small cracks) of the first special mode displayed in the special effect area 04TM003. This effect image is an image reminiscent of the fact that the motion-related display 04TM001 is shining. As described above, the effect image is displayed on the motion related display 04TM001 during the period in which the display control of the battle effect is continuously performed in the image display device 5, thereby causing the player to pay attention to the motion related display 04TM001. , Can make you expect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (25) (step T14 in FIG. 11-18), the effect control CPU 120 continues to execute display control of the battle effect corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, the operation related display 04TM001 in the first special mode with the effect image is erased from the special effect area 04TM003, and an operation promotion display for prompting the player to operate the spherical button 04TM102A is displayed at the center of the screen. The operation promotion display displayed at this time is a display mode reflecting the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 that has been displayed (immediately before erasure), and is larger than the motion related display 04TM001 (with a display range). Since it is displayed at the center of the screen, it is more visible to the player than the action-related display 04TM001. The operation promotion display displayed at this time is an image that imitates the shape of the sphere button 04TM102A, and includes the characters “one blow !!”, so that the player can easily operate the sphere button 04TM102A once. It is possible to grasp.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-19 (25), since the display mode of the motion-related display 04TM001 that has been displayed (immediately before erasure) is the first special mode (spherical image with small cracks), The first special operation promotion display 04TM035A simulating the spherical button 04TM102A in the first special mode (the state where the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are slightly opened) is displayed. Further, when the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed, the production control CPU 120 changes the sphere button 04TM102A from the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed) to the first special mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B). Slightly open).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (26), the effect control CPU 120 responds to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A of the first special mode when the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed. At the timing of T15 shown in FIG. 11-18, the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, “232”) that causes the display result to be out of place is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, the teammate character 04TM010 performs a defeat effect in which the enemy character 04TM015 is defeated, and displays the character “defeat” on the upper portion of the image display device 5 to notify that the display result is out of order. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 does not rotate the rotation motor 04TM134 and does not rotate the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotation shaft 04TM131.

  In this way, the effect control CPU 120 notifies that the display result has been lost by executing the defeat effect in the image display device 5 in response to the operation of the spherical button 04TM102A in response to the operation promotion display. At the same time, by not changing the mode of the sphere button 04TM102A according to the operation (the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotating shaft 04TM131 are not rotated), it is notified that the display result is out of sync.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in response to receiving the symbol confirmation designation command from the gaming control microcomputer 100 at the timing T16 shown in FIG. 11-18. The combination of decorative symbols ("232") is confirmed and stopped, and the sphere button 04TM102A is changed from the first special mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are slightly open) to the normal mode (the split hemispheres 04TM141A and 04TM141B are fully closed). Change to state). Thereby, the variation display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of the super reach deviation is completed.

(Specific example of the first change suggestion effect)
Next, a specific example in the case of executing the first change suggestion effect corresponding to the normal mode hold display will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 11-20 is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect image displayed on the image display apparatus 5 when the hold display of a notice object is a normal mode, and a change suggestion effect is performed once.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-20 (1) to (5), the CPU 120 for effect control determines that the final display mode of the motion-related display is set to the normal mode in step S04TM1010 in the change suggestion effect determination process. In step S04TM1020, the change pattern of the motion-related display is determined to be the change pattern 102 (normal to normal), and in step S04TM1040, the first change suggestion effect is set to the first change suggestion effect (no weapon). Has been decided. In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 11-20 (1) to (4), (6), the effect control CPU 120 sets the final display mode of the motion related display as the third special in step S04TM1010 in the change suggestion effect determination process. In step S04TM1020, it is decided to change the movement-related display change pattern to change pattern 131 (normal → crack (large)). In step S04TM1040, the first time is determined. The change suggestion effect is determined to be the first change suggestion effect (no weapon).

  First, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (1), the effect control CPU 120 displays the decorative symbol “2” in the symbol display area 5 </ b> L of the image display device 5 in the state where the first reserved memory number is 1 and the symbol display. The decorative symbol “4” is fixed in the area 5C, and the decorative symbol “6” is stopped in the symbol display area 5R. That is, the combination of decorative symbols for which the display result is “off” is confirmed and stopped. The special effect area 04TM003 displays a normal mode motion-related display 04TM001 (sphere image without cracks), and the hold display area 04TM004 displays a normal mode (round) hold display 04TM002. ing. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (2), the effect control CPU 120 starts to display the decorative symbols in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. To do. In the shift display executed at this time, the hold display 04TM002 in the normal mode is shifted to the special effect area 04TM003 side and deleted. At this time, when the shifted hold display 04TM002 overlaps with the motion-related display 04TM001, the hold display 04TM002 is erased, so that the player sees whether the normal-type hold display 04TM002 is absorbed in the motion-related display 04TM001. looks like. In addition, in the special effect area 04TM003, an operation related display 04TM001 (a spherical image without cracks) in a normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the first change suggestion effect when the variable display of the decorative symbols is executed in the symbol display area 5L, the symbol display area 5C, and the symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5. Based on the decision to do, the first change suggesting effect is executed as the first change suggesting effect at a predetermined timing from the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (4). In the present embodiment, along with the start of the first change suggestion effect, a teammate character 04TM010A without a weapon appears from the right side of the screen. At this time, in the special effect area 04TM003, the motion related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode is displayed. At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A is in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  Here, when it is determined that the final display mode of the motion related display is set to the normal mode, as shown in FIG. Do not wait for the weapon against the cracked sphere image). Thus, as a result of executing the effect that the teammate character 04TM010A acts on the motion-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode, the change pattern 102 (the first change suggesting effect changes in the normal mode) The motion related display 04TM001 does not change from the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) at the end of the first change suggestion effect (FIG. 11-20 (5)). At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state) even after the end of the first change suggestion effect. Thereafter, a special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed as an operation suggestion display regarding the sphere button 04TM102A. At this time, the sphere button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the final display mode of the motion related display is the third special mode, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (6), the teammate character 04TM010A that has appeared is the motion related display 04TM001 in the normal mode. An action of hitting without waiting for a weapon is performed on (a spherical image without cracks). As described above, as a result of the effect that the teammate character 04TM010A acts on the motion-related display 04TM001 (spherical image without cracks) in the normal mode, the change pattern 131 (crack [large] in the first change suggesting effect) is obtained. The motion-related display 04TM001 changes from the normal mode (spherical image without cracks) to the third special mode (spherical image with large cracks) at the end of the first change suggestion effect. (FIG. 11-20 (6)). At this time, the spherical button 04TM102A remains in the normal mode (fully closed state) even after the end of the first change suggestion effect. Thereafter, the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is displayed as the operation suggestion display regarding the sphere button 04TM102A, and the sphere button 04TM102A changes from the normal mode (fully closed state) to the third special mode (fully opened state).

  As described above, when the hold display is changed to a display mode different from the normal mode (when changed to the first specific mode (hammer) or the second specific mode (sword)), the first time As the change suggestion effect, the second change suggestion effect or the third change suggestion effect is executed. On the other hand, when the hold display does not change from the normal mode, the second change suggesting effect and the third change suggesting effect are not executed, but there is a possibility that the first change suggesting effect (no weapon) is executed. Thereby, even if the hold display remains in the normal mode, the player can have an expectation that the action-related display changes, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation when the hold display remains unchanged in the normal mode.

(Modification)
(1) In the above embodiment, when the hold display is displayed in the first specific mode or the second specific mode, an example is shown in which the display is larger than the normal mode hold display. Not only when the hold display becomes the first specific mode or the second specific mode at the time of starting winning, or when the hold display changes from the normal mode to the first specific mode or the second specific mode at the time of shifting. By changing (moving) the display position of the hold display in the normal mode, the hold display in the first specific mode or the second specific mode may be emphasized and displayed. For example, when the hold display is displayed in the first specific mode (hammer shape) or the second specific mode (sword shape) at the start winning prize, or the hold display is changed from the normal mode to the first specific mode (hammer type) or In the case of changing to two specific modes (sword shape), the first specific mode (hammer shape) or the second specific mode (sword shape) is displayed as the display interval of the hold display in the normal mode that has already been displayed. You may make it emphasize that the hold display was displayed in the mode different from a normal mode by making it display narrower than before. When the hold display is displayed in the first specific mode or the second specific mode, or when the display mode of the hold display changes, the effect image may be superimposed on the target hold display to be emphasized. A sound effect may be output.

  (2) In the above embodiment, there are the first specific mode (hammer type) and the second specific mode (sword shape) as the display mode of the hold display different from the normal mode (round shape), and the operation related display As for the degree of change expectation, the relationship of the first specific mode (hammer shape) <the second specific mode (sword shape) exists, and the third specific mode (sword shape) is displayed as the hold display. Although an example in which a change suggestion effect (an effect by an ally character with a sword) is executed and the display mode of the motion-related display changes at a rate of 100% is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, As a display mode, when a third specific mode (saddle shape) is provided and a hold display of the third specific mode (saddle shape) is displayed, a fourth change suggestion effect (effect by a teammate character with a spear) ) Is executed and the display state of the motion-related display at a rate of 100% There may be changes to the third special aspect [cracking (large). Here, in the above example, when the display mode of the motion-related display is the third special mode [crack (large)], the big hit is fixed, so when the hold display of the third specific mode (saddle shape) is displayed. The jackpot will be finalized. By providing the effect pattern related to the hold display and the action related display, it is possible to further improve the interest of the change suggestion effect related to the hold display and the action related display.

  (3) In the above embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the hold display is changed at the timing at which the hold display is shifted (at the time of the first shift, at the time of the second shift, and at the time of the final shift) has been described. You may make it possible to change the display mode of a hold display not only at a form but at timings other than the time of a shift. For example, while a variable display is being performed, a character with a placard that reads “hold change” appears from the right side of the screen, and the display mode of the hold display at the position where the character stops changes. Also good. In other words, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by executing an effect that acts on the hold display of the notice target.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the change suggestion effects include the first change suggestion effect (no weapon), the second change suggestion effect (hammer), and the third change suggestion effect (sword). Although the example in which the type of change suggestion effect varies depending on the presence or absence and the type of weapon was shown, the type of change suggestion effect is not limited to this form, but the type of change suggestion effect is varied depending on the type of character that appears Also good. For example, the change suggestion effect may be diversified by providing a character with a low rate of changing the motion related display and a character with a high rate of changing the motion related display.

  (5) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-20 (6), the motion-related display of the third special mode in which the big hit is determined is a spherical image with a large crack, but in addition to this, A character suggesting that the display result is a big hit may be displayed in the special effect area 04TM003. For example, when displaying the action-related display of the third special mode, characters such as “destruction” or “win”, “complete destruction” or “complete victory” may be displayed in the special effect area 04TM003. Since these characters have a higher display priority than the action-related display (the display layer is higher), it appears to the player as being displayed in front of the action-related display. Furthermore, it may be suggested whether the big hit type is “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” depending on the content of the character displayed at this time and the color of the character. For example, when the character color displayed in the special effect area 04TM003 is white, the ratio of the normal big hit is high, and when the character color displayed in the special effect area 04TM003 is red, the probability change big hit. You may make it a ratio become high. In addition, when the character displayed in the special effect area 04TM003 does not include the word “complete”, the percentage that is usually a big hit is high, and the character displayed in the special effect area 04TM003 includes the character “complete”. In such a case, the probability of a probable big hit may be increased.

  (6) In the above embodiment, as the display information different from the operation related display, an active display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative pattern (special symbol) being executed may be displayed. For example, this active display may be displayed in an active display area provided between the special effect area 04TM003 and the hold display area 04TM004 on the effect screen. Further, the big hit expectation degree may be suggested by the display mode (display color) of the active display. Further, an effect of changing the display mode (display color) of this active display may be executed. As described above, the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the action-related display are related to the display mode of the operation promotion display and the mode (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A, both of which suggest the jackpot expectation. However, by making it possible to display the active display separately from the motion related display, the player is focused on the display mode of the motion related display (degree of cracking) and the display mode (display color) of the active display. Can also attract the attention of the player, and can give a variety of effects that suggest the expectation level of jackpot.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the display mode of the operation related display is changed as an effect related to the display result of the variable display being executed has been described. As a prefetching notice effect related to the display result, the display mode of the operation related display may be changed. For example, when the first number of reserved memories is 1 or more, by executing one or more change suggestion effects on the action-related display over a plurality of variable displays, it becomes a target of a prefetch notice effect. The display mode of the action-related display is changed by the time the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is executed (until the reserved display corresponding to the reserved storage subject to the pre-reading notice effect is shifted to the special effect area). It may be changed.

  (8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-17 (19) and 11-19 (25), the timing of changing the mode (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A is within one fluctuation display period. In Fig. 1, an example is shown in which the super reach production (battle production) is executed only once. As described above, the number of times of changing the mode (form) of the sphere button 04TM102A is the same as or less than the number of times of changing the display mode of the motion-related display, thereby including a sphere including a movable part (split hemisphere). While reducing the control burden which changes the mode (form) of button 04TM102A, it is suppressing that the failure frequency of a movable part (split hemisphere) becomes high.

  The timing for changing the form (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A is not limited to such a form, and may be provided a plurality of times within one fluctuation display period. For example, the mode of the spherical button 04TM102A may be changed in correspondence with the timing at which the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 displayed in the special effect area 04TM003 of the image display device 5 is changed. As shown in FIG. 11-16 (11), at the timing when the display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 is changed from the normal mode to the first special mode (at the timing of T8 shown in FIG. 11-14), the spherical button 04TM102A is normally set. As shown in FIG. 11-17 (14), the operation-related display 04TM001 is changed from the first special mode to the second special mode (as shown in FIG. 11-14). At the timing of T12 shown), the spherical button 04TM102A may be changed from the first special mode to the second special mode.

  (9) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (19) and FIG. 11-19 (25), the mode (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A is the final of the motion-related display 04TM001 at a rate of 100%. Although the example which becomes a mode (form) corresponding to a typical display mode was shown, according to the final display mode of operation related display 04TM001, the mode (form) of spherical button 04TM102A is not limited to such a mode. It may be determined at a different rate.

  For example, when the display result is “out of”, and the final display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 is the first special mode, the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed and the ratio of the spherical button 04TM102A to the normal mode is 60%. When the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed and the ratio of the spherical button 04TM102A to the first special mode is 40%, the final display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 is the second special mode. The ratio that the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed and the sphere button 04TM102A is in the normal mode is 70%, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed, and the ratio that the sphere button 04TM102A is in the first special mode is 20%. %, Second special operation promotion display Proportion of spherical buttons 04TM102A is the second special embodiment with 4TM035B is displayed may be 10%.

  On the other hand, when the display result is “big hit” and the final display mode of the motion-related display 04TM001 is the first special mode, the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed and the ratio of the spherical button 04TM102A to the normal mode is 40. When the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed and the ratio of the spherical button 04TM102A to the first special mode is 60%, the final display mode of the motion-related display 04TM001 is the second special mode. The ratio that the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed and the sphere button 04TM102A is in the normal mode is 5%, the ratio that the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed and the sphere button 04TM102A is in the first special mode is 25%, second special operation promotion display 0 Proportion of spherical buttons 04TM102A is the second special embodiment with TM035B is displayed may be 70%.

  That is, when the final display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 is the second special mode and when the final display mode of the motion related display 04TM001 is the first special mode, the mode (form) of the spherical button 04TM102A and The reliability of the jackpot expectation suggested by the operation promotion display corresponding to this may be increased.

  (10) In the above embodiment, only when the display result is “big hit” and the victory effect is executed (when the combination of big hit symbols is stopped and displayed), light is emitted in response to the operation of the sphere button 04TM102A. Although the example which rotates the body 04TM103 and the rotating shaft 04TM131 was shown, it is not restricted to such a form, It is made to rotate the light-emitting body 04TM103 and the rotating shaft 04TM131 triggered by having developed into a super reach effect (battle effect). Alternatively, the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotating shaft 04TM131 may be rotated when the ally character becomes dominant over the enemy character in the middle part of the super reach effect (battle effect).

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, once the divisional hemisphere 04TM141A and the divisional hemisphere 04TM141B are in a divided state (not in the fully closed state) during the variation display, until the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped thereafter. There is no change in which the crack width (distance between the split hemisphere 04TM141A and the split hemisphere 04TM141B) becomes small. For example, the spherical button 04TM102A does not change from the second special mode to the first special mode. This keeps the expectation until the player finishes the operation. Not only in such a form, but during the change display, after splitting hemisphere 04TM141A and splitting hemisphere 04TM141B are split (after they are not fully closed), until spherical button 04TM102A is operated In addition, a change in which the crack width becomes smaller may occur. For example, in the middle part of the super reach effect (battle effect), when the ally character is inferior to the enemy character, a change may be made such that the crack width decreases. The spherical button 04TM102A is changed from the second special mode. You may make it change to a 1st special aspect.

  (12) In the above embodiment, when notifying the occurrence of a big hit, the rotation motor 04TM134 is rotated, and the luminous body 04TM103 and the rotation shaft 04TM131 are simultaneously rotated to improve interest. Not limited to this, the rotation motor 04TM134 is rotated during a period that is controlled to a gaming state advantageous to the player, for example, a period that is controlled to a big hit gaming state or a period that is controlled to a high base state. Thus, the light emitter 04TM103 and the rotating shaft 04TM131 may be rotated simultaneously.

  (13) In the above embodiment, the operation unit that can be operated by the player is the push button 04TM102B and the spherical button 04TM102A, and both are examples of the operation unit that can be pressed by the player. Not limited to the form, the player may be allowed to perform a predetermined operation effect (cut-in notice effect or result notification effect) in response to contact with a predetermined area where the touch sensor is provided. A predetermined motion effect (cut-in notice effect or result notification effect) may be executed in response to the player's motion being detected by an infrared sensor or the like.

  (14) In the above embodiment, when the operation unit operated by the player is the push button 04TM102B, the operation promotion display 04TM030 is displayed, and when the operation unit operated by the player is the spherical button 04TM102A. The special operation promotion display 04TM035, the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A, the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B, or the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is displayed. That is, according to the operation unit operated by the player, it is possible to change the mode of the operation promotion display that prompts the player to operate the operation unit. Then, when the operation promotion display corresponding to the sphere button 04TM102A is displayed and the operation promotion display corresponding to the push button 04TM102B is not displayed, the operation promotion display corresponding to the sphere button 04TM102A is not displayed and it corresponds to the push button 04TM102B. The percentage of big hits is higher than when the operation promotion display is displayed.

  In such a configuration, either one of the operation promotion display corresponding to the spherical button 04TM102A and the operation promotion display corresponding to the push button 04TM102B is selectively performed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of the battle) during the super reach production. It may be displayed. In other words, when the operation of the sphere button 04TM102A is prompted at the timing immediately before the notification of the battle win / loss (display result), the big hit is made at a higher rate than when the operation of the push button 04TM102B is prompted. A production structure may be adopted. When such an effect configuration is adopted, the operation-related display display mode suggests which operation unit (push button 04TM102B or spherical button 04TM102A) the operation promotion display is displayed on. Also good.

  For example, during the period from when the variable display is started to when the reach state is established and develops into a super reach production, the operation related display of the common mode is displayed regardless of which operation display corresponding to which operation unit is displayed. (For example, a character “?”) Is displayed, and the display mode of the motion-related display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the operation unit to be operated in the middle stage of the super reach production. For example, if the operation unit to be operated is the push button 04TM102B, the operation related display is changed from “?” To an image imitating the push button 04TM102B, and if the operation unit to be operated is the spherical button 04TM102A, the operation is performed. The related display is changed from “?” To an image imitating the spherical button 04TM102A. Then, in the final stage of the super reach effect, the operation promotion display reflecting the display mode of the final motion related display is displayed. That is, if the final display mode of the motion-related display is an image simulating the push button 04TM102B, an operation promotion display corresponding to the push button 04TM102B is displayed, and the final display mode of the motion-related display is the spherical button 04TM102A. If it is a simulated image, an operation promotion display corresponding to the spherical button 04TM102A is displayed.

  It should be noted that until the operation promotion display is displayed, the player may not be able to completely grasp which operation unit the operation promotion display corresponding to is displayed. For example, when the operation unit whose operation is prompted by the operation promotion display is the push button 04TM102B, the character “?” Which is the operation related display is finally displayed in blue at a rate of 80%, and a rate of 20% In the case where the operation unit whose operation is prompted by the operation promotion display is the spherical button 04TM102A, the character “?” Which is the operation related display is finally displayed in blue at a rate of 20%. It may be displayed in red at a rate of 80%. As described above, the ratio of displaying the operation promotion display corresponding to each operation unit is different depending on the display mode of the operation related display, so that the change pattern of the operation related display is varied and the interest is improved. be able to.

  (15) It should be noted that depending on the display mode of the hold display, the ratio of which operation-related display corresponding to which operation unit is displayed may be different. The ratio of whether the operation promotion display corresponding to the operation unit is displayed may be different. For example, when the hold display is an image simulating the push button 04TM102B, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display is executed, the display mode of the action-related display is a character of “?” At a rate of 80%. In response to the fact that the image changes to an image simulating the push button 04TM102B (no change from the character “?” At a rate of 20%), and the display mode of the motion-related display is an image simulating the push button 04TM102B. Finally, an operation promotion display that prompts the user to operate the push button 04TM102B may be displayed. Further, when the hold display is an image imitating the sphere button 04TM102A, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display is executed, the display mode of the motion-related display is a character of “?” At a rate of 80%. Corresponds to the image that imitates the sphere button 04TM102A (no change from the character “?” At a rate of 20%), and the display mode of the motion-related display corresponds to the image simulating the sphere button 04TM102A. Finally, an operation promotion display that prompts the user to operate the spherical button 04TM102A may be displayed.

  (16) In the above embodiment, the display mode of the operation promotion display and the mode of the actual sphere button 04TM102A have a one-to-one correspondence, and the sphere button 04TM102A is always normal when the special operation promotion display 04TM035 is displayed. When the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed, the spherical button 04TM102A is always in the first special mode (the split hemisphere has the smallest crack width), and the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is displayed. When the sphere button 04TM102A is always in the second special mode (the split width of the split hemisphere is medium), the sphere button 04TM102A is always in the third special mode (the split width of the split hemisphere) when the third special operation promotion display 04TM035C is displayed. Is the maximum), but not limited to this form, The work unit, may be may alter the manner which does not correspond to the display mode of the operation promoting display. For example, when the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed, the sphere button 04TM102A may eventually change to the second special mode or the third special mode. However, when the first special operation promotion display 04TM035A is displayed, the rate at which the spherical button 04TM102A changes to the second special mode, or the rate at which the first special mode changes to the third special mode. Is high. That is, the rate at which the operation unit changes to a mode corresponding to the display mode of the operation promotion display is higher than the rate at which the operation unit changes to a mode different from the mode corresponding to the display mode of the operation promotion display.

  Even when the operation unit is configured to be changed to a mode that does not correspond to the display mode of the operation promotion display as described above, the operation unit is changed to the display mode of the operation promotion display. It is assumed that there is no change to an aspect with a lower expectation than the corresponding aspect. For example, when the second special operation promotion display 04TM035B is displayed, it is assumed that the spherical button 04TM102A does not change from the normal mode and does not change until the first special mode. That is, the rate at which the operation unit changes to a mode with a higher expectation than the display mode of the operation promotion display is higher than the rate at which the operation unit changes to a mode with a lower expectation than the display mode of the operation promotion display And

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General prize opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start opening Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hit ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
Action presentation executing means capable of executing action presentation by the player's action;
An operation related display means capable of displaying an operation related display related to the operation effect,
There are a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode as a display mode of the operation related display,
When the operation-related display is displayed in the second mode, a higher ratio is controlled to the advantageous state than when the operation-related display is displayed in the first mode,
The gaming machine, wherein a proportion of the operation-related display displayed in the second mode differs depending on a display mode of the specific display.

Images